JP2018000227A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of indicating an expectation degree to a player in an easy-to-understand manner.SOLUTION: A game machine includes detection means that can detect an action of a player, prompting notification means that can execute prompting notification to prompt an action of the player, and performance execution means that can execute a predetermined performance based on the detection of the action of the player by the detection means. The prompting notification means can execute the prompting notification for prompting an action by a first pattern displaying at least a first prompting image and a second pattern displaying a second prompting image in addition to the first prompting image. An expectation degree differs depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern is used for executing the promoting notification. Information display means is provided on a main board that can display predetermined prize ball information on a prize ball.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 32

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so called slot machine).

  Note that the game value is the right for a player to easily win a ball with respect to the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine, or to be in an advantageous state for the player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as “round”. A game in a round may be referred to as a “round game”.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as “reach effect”. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, the cited document 1 describes performing an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button and an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button during the variable display. In addition, the expectation is made different by displaying an image imitating the appearance of the effect button for the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button, and by the difference in the display mode of the image (for example, the difference in size and color). It is described.

JP 2013-188306 A

  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to understand that the degree of expectation is different.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of showing the degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner for a player.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a main board (for example, the main board 11, the main board 9011, etc.) for controlling the game, and a predetermined area (for example, second start winning prize) in which a prize ball is paid out by passing the game medium. An ordinary variable winning ball device 906B serving as a mouth, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a big winning port, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first start winning port, and general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning area, Information display means (for example, display monitor 9029) capable of displaying predetermined prize ball information (for example, combination of roles, ratios) regarding prize balls to be paid out by passing the game medium to a predetermined area, and detecting a player's action Possible detection means (for example, push button 120, stick controller 122, infrared sensor, etc.) and a promotion notification (for example, a first operation) for encouraging the player's action A promotion notification means (for example, a portion in which the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8111, S8125, S8139, S8153, S8167) capable of executing an advancement notification or an operation promotion notification for displaying a second operation promotion image; Based on the detection of the player's action by the detection means, the effect execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps S8114, S8128, S8142, S8156) that can execute a predetermined effect (for example, each button effect). , S8170), and the promotion notification means promotes one action (for example, an operation of pressing the push button 120 once, an operation of repeatedly pressing, an operation of long pressing, etc.) The first notification image (for example, a first image simulating the appearance of the push button 120) A first pattern displaying at least an operation promotion image) and a second promotion image (for example, a second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character) different from the first promotion image in addition to the first promotion image. The second pattern can be executed (see FIGS. 32 to 34), and the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first notification or the second pattern is executed (for example, the first pattern). What is expected is the first effect mode of the hit effect button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed by one pattern, and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the hit button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. The information display means is provided on the main board so that visibility to the predetermined prize ball information is not hindered.
According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be easily shown to the player. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize what adjustment has been made.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the promotion notification means displays the first promotion image in a plurality of modes (for example, the first operation promotion image (small), the first operation promotion image (medium), the first operation promotion image (large)). Or the like, and the degree of expectation varies depending on which of the plurality of first promotion images is displayed (for example, the operation promotion for displaying the first operation promotion image (medium)). The first effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure in which the notification is performed, and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure in which the operation promotion notification for displaying the first operation promotion image (large) is performed. The degree of expectation may be different (see FIG. 32C).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be improved.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the promotion notification means displays the second promotion image in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a second operation promotion image (press) or a second operation promotion image (stroke)). The degree of expectation varies depending on which second promotion image of the plurality of modes is displayed (for example, whether or not an operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (press) is performed) The expectation level differs between the second effect mode of the hour button effect and the third effect mode of the hit button effect in which the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (blow) is performed. Reference) may be configured.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be improved.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect at a plurality of timings (for example, when the effect symbol is rapidly changed, when reach is established, when hitting or not, etc.) (Refer to FIG. 31), and the promotion notification means executes the promotion notification by using either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different rate in accordance with the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed (for example, during high-speed fluctuation). At the timing when the button effect is executed and when the reach button is executed, the operation promotion notification is executed at the rate of 100% by the first pattern, and at the timing when the hit effect is executed, When the display result is out of order, the operation promotion notification is executed by the first pattern at the rate of 70% (the second pattern at the rate of 30%). When fruit is big hit performs an operation promoting notification by the first pattern at a rate of 35% (second pattern at a ratio of 65%). See Figure 32) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the detection means includes an operation means (for example, a push button 120 or a stick controller 122) that can be operated by the player, and the effect execution means is an operation means. A predetermined effect (for example, each button effect) can be executed in response to the operation for the effective period notification means (for example, effect control for displaying the remaining effective period image) for informing the effective period for which the operation is effective. When the effective period ends, an end notification means that indicates the end of the effective period (for example, displays an end image of the effective period) (for example, a portion where the microcomputer 100 executes steps S8112 and S8119) For example, the production control microcomputer 100 includes a part for executing step S8116), and an end notification means When the operation is performed before the expiration of the effective period, an end notification is made (for example, a part that executes step S8116 when the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S8113). It may be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the effective period has expired based on the operation.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the detection means includes operation means (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, etc.) operable by the player, and the effect execution means is the operation means. The operation notifying means includes an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect (for example, an operation section effect) using the button, and the promotion notification means displays a promotion image (for example, an operation promotion image) for prompting an operation when the operation effect is executed. Display control means for displaying on the display means, and the operation effect executing means can change the operation means into a plurality of modes (for example, “white”, “red”, “white / vibration”, “ The display control means changes the acceleration image into a plurality of modes (for example, “white / small”, “red / small”, “white / small” shown in FIG. 45) according to the degree of expectation. Either “Large” or “Red / Large”) Common image display control means for displaying and displaying a promotion image in a mode common to a plurality of modes of the operation means (for example, “white” (“white / small” and “white / large”) shown in FIG. 45) It may be configured as follows.
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be improved.

  Moreover, the form for implementing invention mentioned later includes the invention concerning the following means A1 to A10 and means B1 to B9. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of a game ball and a large number of game nails are provided on the surface of the game board. is there. In this type of gaming machine, the passing rate of the winning opening and the passing gate fluctuates due to adjustment of game nails provided on the game board. In such a gaming machine, a game ball payout rate may be designed by adjusting a game nail or the like. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what kind of adjustment was made to the game nail or the like, there is a problem that it is difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate is as designed. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can recognize what adjustments have been made.

A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) of means A1 is a predetermined area (for example, a second variable starting ball serving as a second start winning opening) in which a prize ball is paid out when a game medium (eg, a game ball) passes. 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a big winning opening, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first start winning opening, and general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as a general winning area, and a main board for controlling the game (for example, Information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029) provided on the main board 9011) and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, a combination of roles and ratios) relating to prize balls that are paid out by passing the game medium to a predetermined area; The information display means is provided on a main board for controlling a game so that visibility is not hindered.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The information display means is arranged on the front surface when the main substrate is visually recognized (for example, the front surface when the main substrate 9011 is visually recognized).
According to the said structure, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to an information display means is prevented.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or A2,
The information display means is disposed at a position that is not hidden by a seal seal (for example, a seal seal 9011S) that seals the main substrate.
According to the said structure, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to an information display means is prevented.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A3,
The information display means is located at a position where a heat radiating hole (for example, a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electrical components of the main board) provided in a board case (for example, board case 90201) in the main board is not directly in front. Has been placed.
According to the said structure, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to an information display means is prevented.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4,
The information display means is arranged at a position that does not overlap with a peripheral board other than the main board (for example, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, an audio lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board). ing.
According to the said structure, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to an information display means is prevented.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A5,
The predetermined information includes a winning ball paid out by passing through a movable area (for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, a special variable winning ball apparatus 907) and a fixed area (ordinary winning ball apparatus 906A, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D). ) Is information related to the relationship with the prize ball paid out.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the role combination and the role ratio.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A6,
The information display means can switch and display a plurality of the predetermined information every predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
According to the said structure, the increase in a member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A7,
The information display means displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, 60000 prize balls) as the predetermined information.
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A8,
The information display means switches and displays information for each predetermined unit (for example, short-term roles, ratio of short-term roles) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative numbers of roles, cumulative ratio) as the predetermined information.
According to the said structure, the information for every predetermined unit and cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A9,
The information display means is provided in the main substrate and is accommodated in a caulked substrate case (for example, the substrate case 90201).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Predetermined conditions (effective start winning or first starting winning port, reach to the first starting winning port, reach in a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes after the general winning) after the game medium enters the general winning area When the state is established), there is provided an effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (prefetching notice effect), specific effect G (variation result notice effect)). This is a characteristic gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general winning area, and the specific effect is obtained after the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to increase interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Execute a notification effect to execute a notification effect that identifiable that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area (any one of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning the general winning opening) A gaming machine further comprising means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as the notification effect for informing that the state after the game medium has entered, it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. Includes an effect that is difficult to grasp and an effect that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general winning area, and as the latter effect, the general winning area There is an effect in which the character is continuously displayed on the image display device until a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) elapses immediately after the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not it is the specific period (the specific period (character display period) varies depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period varies depending on the form of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears) (The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by paying attention to the aspect of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to means B4 may be as follows, for example.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) has a predetermined time period (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). Any specific period is selected, and an effect mode (for example, the type of character displayed on the image display device 905) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is specified for the specific period) is determined. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of the character A) is performed more than when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is advisable to increase the determined ratio. In addition, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, display of the character B) is more effective than when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is advisable to increase the determined ratio.
In addition, when the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one to one (if character A is fixed for 1 minute, character B is 2 minutes, character C is fixed for 3 minutes) ), Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) determines one of the predetermined effect aspects. The notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) may be executed according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
The variable display means is based on a start condition based on the entry of a game medium into the start winning area (when the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, a game ball wins the first start winning opening (effective start winning). ), The start condition (controlled by the big hit game state) is established after the game ball wins (effective start win) at the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit. The variable display is executed based on the fact that the special display game is not executed).
The effect execution means corresponds to the variable display game to be notified in the start winning memory display area 905H for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form) characterized in that a hold change effect for changing a display part from a normal mode to a special mode is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general winning area by creating an interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
Holding information corresponding to variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of a variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Display information) on the display device (image display device 905).
The notice effect is for notifying the display result of variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the form of the hold information (if the start winning determination result specifying command is a command that specifies “big hit”, The display portion corresponding to the command is a pending change effect in which the normal mode (for example, blue or red) is changed to the special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating “out”. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
The effect execution means displays the object (characters A to C) on the display device so as to be able to specify that the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is specified (to the general winning opening) (Any of the characters A to C appear immediately after winning)
The notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (the display portion corresponding to the special game that is held by the displayed character performing some action) The game machine is characterized in that the production is changed from a normal mode to a special mode.
According to this, it is possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific performance.
Specifically, it is possible to recognize that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information by creating an effect in which the mode of the hold information also changes with a change in the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B7,
In the gaming machine, the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period). is there.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B8,
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four from the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 50D),
The specific period varies depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (if the first general winning port 9050A or the second general winning port 9050B has been won, one minute, two minutes, or five minutes are specified from the general winning point) It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but when winning the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D, only the five minutes from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C) Is a gaming machine characterized in that it can appear))).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B10-means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Motion detection means (operation button 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting the player's motion;
A specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-continuation effect) is detected when the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the game medium enters the general winning area. An effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye notice effect) is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 50th effect form to the 53rd effect form). .
According to this, after the game medium enters the general winning area, the specific effect is executed in response to the player's action, so that it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine of means B10,
It is notified in a identifiable manner that the game medium has entered the general winning area (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is increased every time a winning is made to the general prize opening. In the effect form and the 53rd effect form, a notice effect (“cut-in”, “pseudo-run”, “chance eye”) that can be executed every time a prize is entered into the general winning opening is determined, and the character 904000a corresponding to the determination result is determined. Up to 904000c (displayed) A notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a notification effect is further provided.
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
A gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of action (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling execution of the specific effect, the notification effect mode ("cut-in" character 904000a, "pseudo ream" The gaming machine is characterized in that the character 904000b and the character “chance” (904000c) are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation can perform the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning port 9050A of the left game area 9010A or When winning in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is notified at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the right game area 9010B). It is a gaming machine.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B13,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The form of the notification effect varies depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B is awarded). In this case, either the “cut-in” character 904000a or the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b can be displayed, and when the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, One of the characters “Cut-in” 904000a and “Chance eyes” 904000c can be displayed).
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B14,
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the general winning a prize was won in the normal state). In the case (when winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left gaming area 9010A), when winning the general winning opening when the probability change state or the short time state (the first gaming area 9010B of the right gaming area 9010B) 3) the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B11 to the means B15,
The form of the notification effect varies depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the characters 904000a and “pseudo” in the normal state are displayed. (The “continuous” character 904000b can be displayed, and the “cut-in” character 904000a and the “chance eye” character 904000c can be displayed in the probability variation state or the short time state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B16,
The effect execution means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined action is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, (Pseudo-announcement effect can be executed when winning more than 2 times in the prize opening, and chance-notice effect can be executed when winning more than 3 times in the general prize opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B17,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B). When winning, the notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when winning in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B18,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening). When winning a 9050B, either a cut-in notice effect or a pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed, and when winning at the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D, a cut-in notice effect And any chance chance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, interest can be improved by making attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B19,
Depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the execution ratio of the specific effect varies (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, when a general winning opening is won in the normal state) In the case of winning in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B in the left gaming area 9010A), in the case of winning in the general winning opening in the probability changing state or in the short time state (third general (When winning in the winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D), a notification is made to enable execution of a specific effect at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B10 to the means B20,
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, in the normal state, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous effect). Any one of the notice effects can be executed, and in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest differ appropriately according to the state of a game.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B22-means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) The gaming machine (27th effect form to 30th effect form pachinko) characterized in that the ratio of the specific effect to be executed differs depending on when the game medium enters the general winning area during the period when the game is not performed. A gaming machine 901).
According to this, when the variable display is executed and when the variable display is not executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
In the gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 901), the specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect). is there.
According to this, even when variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
A gaming machine of means B22,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed This is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 28th effect form and the 30th effect form), which is not executed when a game medium enters.
According to this, when variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point giving effect, specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
The general winning area when the variable display is executed (within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, within the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed or has been decided to be executed) When the game medium enters and when the variable display is not executed (the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is determined to be executed during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) A different specific effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area during a period when the game is not performed (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form). ).
According to this, when the variable display is being executed and the case where the variable display is not being executed are different different specific effects, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. .

The gaming machine of means B26 is
A gaming machine of means B25,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is executed, effects related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) Is executed as the specific production,
When a game medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. This is a characteristic gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and also when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area It is possible to appropriately enhance interest when a game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any one of the gaming machines (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form) selected from the means B22 to the means B26,
Depending on the state when the game medium has entered the general winning area when the variable display is executed, the ratio of the specific effect to be executed is different (for example, a special game at the time of winning a general winning opening) Whether or not the game is executed, the number of reserved memory at the time of winning the general prize opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general prize opening is the normal state, or the probability change state or the short time state Depending on the classification of whether or not, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B22 to the means B27 (27th effect form to 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 901),
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, a special game is executed when winning the general winning opening) Whether the game is in the normal state, the probability change state, or the short-time state at the time of winning the general winning opening. Depending on the category, etc., different types of specific effects are executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to give interest to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B29-means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 33), a winning rate at a start winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information more easily visible. The invention according to the means B29 to the means B39 is made in view of the above circumstances, and is to make it easy to visually recognize information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B29 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays effect information different from the entry information (for example, a decorative symbol and a fourth symbol, etc.) in an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. Is displayed in a second area β) different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B30 is
A gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the entry information regardless of the aspect of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 87, whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also displayed. Regardless of whether or not is variably displayed, the number of wins to the general winning opening, the number of winning to the first starting winning opening, the number of winning to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. In addition, the number of winnings displayed can be updated according to the winnings at each winning award)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, approach information can be visually recognized irrespective of the aspect of effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Error detection means (abnormality detection sensor group 9026) for detecting errors (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.);
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means sends error information (for example, an error message) for notifying the occurrence of the error to an area where visibility of the entry information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIGS. 87 and 88). Is displayed in a second area β) that is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B32
A gaming machine of means B31,
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (regardless of whether or not an error message is displayed, as shown in FIG. The number of winnings, the number of winnings at the first start winning opening, the number of winnings at the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings at each winning opening. The number of winnings can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the entry information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. And
Information that can display entry information relating to the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.) Display means (image display device 905),
The information display means displays a display result of variable display (for example, a display result of a final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) or a fourth symbol) executed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area, and the entry information. Is displayed in a region where the visibility of the game is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 87, the second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings at each winning opening is displayed). It is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area.

The invention according to means B34 is
A gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the approach information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 87, regardless of whether or not a decorative symbol is variably displayed, Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. Displayed and the number of displayed winnings can be updated according to the winnings at each winning opening)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
This makes it possible to visually recognize the entry information even when variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B34,
Operable operation means (operation button 9030);
Display setting means for setting whether to display the entry information on the information display means in accordance with the operation of the operation means (as shown in FIG. 50, to each winning a prize mouth based on the setting by the operation button 9030 And a presentation control CPU 90120 for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it becomes possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the entry information.

The invention according to means B36 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B35,
An operation means (operation button 9030) operable by the player;
Aggregation period setting means for setting the aggregation period of the entry information in accordance with the operation of the operation means (production control CPU 90120 for setting the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030 as illustrated in FIG. 91); A gaming machine characterized by further comprising:
According to this, the total period can be set according to the player's judgment.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B36,
It further comprises a game state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling a game state (a big hit game state, a probability change state, a short time state, a low base state, a high base state, etc.)
The information display means can display the entry information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 90, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information corresponding to the gaming state.

The invention according to means B38 is
A gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for performing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the fact that the game medium has entered the start area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B),
The gaming state control means includes a low-frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second starting prize opening is not executed) and a high-frequency state (first 2) A high base state in which high opening control for the start winning a prize is being executed)
The information display means includes the entry information relating to the period controlled to the low frequency state (the number of general winnings in the low base state illustrated in FIG. 90) and the entry relating to the period controlled to the high frequency state. Information can be displayed (such as the number of general winnings in the high base state illustrated in FIG. 90).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the entry information according to the low frequency state and the entry information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B29 to the means B38,
Notification is made when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as exemplified in FIG. 91, when the set number of winnings per set period is less than a predetermined reference value, the fact is notified) A gaming machine further comprising notification means (image display device 905) for displaying a message.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B40 and means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 32 and 33), when a player receives a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate at the start winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect display for displaying a character wearing clothes of different colors according to the calculated winning rate. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm information related to the entry of the game medium into the entry area such as the start prize opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above situation, and is intended to enable only a person other than the player (for example, a store clerk in the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. A gaming machine 901),
A granting unit (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for granting a gaming value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the entry area;
A specific operation means (for example, a mode switch 9031, a reset button) that is disabled by the player;
Informing means for notifying the accumulated value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening shown in FIG. 62, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening and the total number of payouts shown in FIG. 62) given by the giving means. For example, an image display device 905)
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operating means (for example, information on the winning number management table is displayed when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode). (Display in 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a shop clerk) can confirm the information.

  The “specific operation means that cannot be operated by the player” may be any means that can be operated by, for example, a game shop clerk or a game machine inspector / inspector.

The invention according to means B41 is
A gaming machine of means B40,
There is an effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for executing effects related to the game,
The notifying means notifies the cumulative value information in a manner corresponding to the aspect of the effect executed by the effect executing means (for example, the character appearing during the notice effect or the reach effect uses the information in the winning number management table). Display aloud or output sound)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is based on the notification mode.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to means B42 to means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, the number of entered balls is uniformly counted up by one by entering the game balls into the normal winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B42 to the means B51 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to increase the interest of games in gaming machines having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect (specific effect D for gradually increasing the filling area 2100a in the gauge image 2100 from the lowest 0 level to the maximum 10 levels) that changes the performance mode in stages according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. Specific execution execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one step is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the interest rate when the game medium enters the general winning area is increased by changing the ratio of the change in the production mode in the specific effect according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
A gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 34th effect form) characterized in that the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different.
According to this, according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the ratio of the effect mode changing in the specific effect is different, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (a jackpot symbol, an off symbol), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is made different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific production may be different (for example, it changes at a high rate when it becomes a big hit symbol, and changes at a lower rate when it becomes a loss symbol). .

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) terminates the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol);
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU90120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect The ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies according to the variable display count until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 35th effect form 901).
According to this, depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed, the ratio of the change in the effect mode in the specific effect varies. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B44,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the ratio in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of being within (for example, 2 times or less), the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol) It may be changed at a rate, and when it becomes an outlier symbol, it may be changed at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B44,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU90120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect When the game medium enters the general winning area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation), the rate of change of the production mode in the specific effect is different. Is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 36th effect form).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different ratios can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B42 to the means B45,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
Depending on the general winning area into which the game medium has entered (when a game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 37th effect form) is characterized in that the rate of change in the effect mode in the specific effect differs.
According to this, the interest rate of the specific effect can be further enhanced by changing the ratio of the change of the effect mode in the specific effect according to the general winning area where the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise in accordance with the entry of the game medium into the general winning area (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is increased stepwise from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10). Specific execution execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed,
According to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (a distinction between a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed and a period during which the special symbol variable display is not being executed, etc.) The stage in which the production mode changes in production is different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form).
According to this, depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. Can do.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
A gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). Is what
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) , A gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different.
According to this, depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different, and thus the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48,
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where it is less than 10 seconds) ) And the display result of the variable display (a jackpot symbol, a loss symbol) executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, the stage of changing the presentation mode in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Accordingly, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production may be different (for example, the number of stages changes when the jackpot symbol is changed, and the number of stages changes when it becomes a loss symbol). Good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48,
The variable display means (image display device 905) terminates the variable display based on the start condition (previous start winning) after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). And the variable display (the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative design) is executed based on the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit gaming state) ,
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol);
A notice effect (prefetching notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display as a target of the prefetching notice effect). Further comprising a notice effect executing means (effect control CPU90120) executed before)
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs according to the variable display frequency until the variable display is executed), and the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th production form 901).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice production is executed. The entertainment of the production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B49,
A period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command, the target of the pre-read notice effect Effect in the specific effect depending on the variable display count until the variable display is executed) and the display result of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect (big hit symbol, off symbol) You may make it the stage in which an aspect changes differ. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed within a predetermined range when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed. In the case of within (for example, 2 times or less), the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production varies depending on the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the announcement production (for example, when it becomes a big hit symbol) It is possible to change the number of stages, and change the number of stages to a smaller number if the pattern is out of place.

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B49,
Reach effect execution means (effect control CPU90120) for executing a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern),
When a game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state in the reach change), and after the execution of the reach effect The stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different when the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing when the game ball wins the general prize opening is after reaching the reach state in the reach variation). Is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 41st effect form).
According to this, when the game medium enters the general winning area before execution of the reach effect, and when the game medium enters the general winning area after execution of the reach effect, the effect mode changes in the specific effect. Different stages can further enhance the interest of specific effects.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B47 to the means B50,
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when a game ball has won one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). The game machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 42nd effect form) is characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game ball is won in any of the above.
According to this, the stage in which a production | presentation aspect changes in a specific production differs according to the general winning area | region where the game medium approached, and can further enhance the interest of a specific production.

  Moreover, the form which implements invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B52-means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 67), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up on the effect display device. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the counted number reaches the number of execution triggers determined by lottery, the player is informed that a memory in the memory is generated. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, an effect (a count-up display) is executed every time a game ball enters the normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, when a game medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The invention according to the means B52 to the means B56 is made in view of the above situation, and it is possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display when a game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative pattern) Variable display means (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905),
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes in which a game is detected is 0, A special effect (when there are less than 3 winning prizes in the general winning opening in 30 minutes, which is detected as being in the middle) and an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning prize." The game machine is characterized by comprising specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a notification image 902200 including characters on the image display device 905.
According to this, it is possible for the player and the game hall to grasp that the number of game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
A gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means is permitted (an effect of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game field setting and the player setting in the display setting table) Control CPU90120),
Clerk operation accepting means (display changeover switch 9032) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect (based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) , Notification that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of a game hall can be reflected regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53,
Storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of game media entering into the general winning area (winning number for 30 minutes);
The number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power interruption (the value of the winning number counter area is erased by power interruption).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control burden for maintaining the memory of the number of entries at the time of power interruption.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B54,
Depending on the state of the gaming machine, the rate at which the specific effect is executed is different (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate between the normal state and the probability changing state or the short time state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B52 to the means B55,
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed in a different manner in the normal state and in the probability variation state or the time-short state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the interest of specific production can be further enhanced.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B57-means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 83), during the execution of a big hit game, the number of prize balls (given value) obtained by entering the game medium into the big prize opening, There has been proposed a gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (given value) obtained when a game medium enters a normal winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intention of the game hall or the player is not reflected as to whether or not an effect is executed when a game medium enters the general winning area. The invention according to the means B57 to B64 is made in view of the above situation, and reflects the intention of the game hall and the player as to whether or not the presentation is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
When a game medium enters the general winning area, a specific effect (displays information in the winning number management table in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, by the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030. Based on the setting, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, the specific effect A: the change result notice effect, the specific effect B: the look-ahead Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing a notice effect);
A gaming machine comprising: setting means (mode change switch 9031, display change switch 9032, and operation button 9030) for setting whether or not execution of the specific effect is permitted by the specific effect execution means. .
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the game hall or the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
A gaming machine of means B57,
It further comprises clerk operation accepting means (mode change switch 9031, display change switch 9032) for accepting a setting operation by the clerk,
When the setting operation is accepted by the store clerk operation accepting unit, the setting unit performs a setting for permitting execution of the specific effect (based on the setting of the mode switch 9031, the number-of-wins management table) Based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, the object is increased every time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed, and the specific effect A : Enables execution of change result notice effect, Specific effect B: Enables prefetch notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the intention of a game hall can be reflected regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58,
A player operation receiving means for receiving a setting operation by the player;
When the setting operation is accepted by the player operation accepting means, the setting means performs a setting for permitting the execution of the specific effect (based on the setting by the operation button 9030 during the demonstration screen display, Based on the setting by the operation button 9030 in the demonstration screen display, which increases the object every time a game ball enters the game, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. Can be executed, specific effect B: pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the player's intention regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B59,
The specific effect informs the number of game media entering the general winning area in a predetermined period (a period controlled to the big hit gaming state) so as to be able to be specified (the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls to the big winning opening) The game machine is characterized in that the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are displayed separately.
According to this, the playability in a predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B60,
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of game media entering the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B61,
The specific effect executing means executes different specific effects according to the number of game media entering the general winning area (executes effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form). It is.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B62,
The specific effect is an effect of notifying the number of game media entering the general winning area in an identifiable manner (increasing the object each time a game ball enters the general winning port)
When a game is not being performed on the gaming machine (the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start winning port specifying command, the general winning port specifying command, and the big winning port winning command are received for a predetermined period of time. An effect control CPU 90120 that makes a game end determination based on the absence of the game medium, and notifies that it is possible to specify that the number of game media entering the general winning area in the specific effect is 0 (game end determination is performed). In the event that the object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is deleted)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B57 to the means B63,
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that display information (an object corresponding to the number of winnings in a general winning opening) corresponding to the number of game media entering the general winning area is displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of game media entering the general winning area.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means B65-means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 59), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes, and the start memory There has been proposed a gaming machine that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is “winning” or “out of game”. In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to enhance the interest of the game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 having a first effect form to a fourth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or short-time state) , To execute different specific effects (specific effect A is executed in the normal state, and specific effect B is executed in the probability change or short-time state)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 having a fifth effect form to a twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form),
In the first game state (normal state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
In the second game state (probability change or short-time state), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change state) The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (after the reach change state is established, the rate is specified at a higher period than the reach change state or before the reach state is established. Production is performed)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D). Machine 901),
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) when a game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening) (First special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905);
A granting unit (game control microcomputer 90100) for giving a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general winning area;
Specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: prefetch notice effect),
When the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after reaching reach state of reach change) and when during the second period (before reach reach state of reach change or reach change state) Different specific effects are executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. The specific effect A is executed, and the specific effect B is executed during a period other than the reach change or before the reach state of reach change is established)
This is a gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine 901 having a 17th effect form to a 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 14th effect form to the 16th effect form, the 22nd effect form to the 24th effect form),
During the first period (after the reach state of reach variation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of game media entering the general winning area becomes the first entry number,
During the second period (period other than reach fluctuation or before reach reach is reached), the number of game media entering the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. In some cases, the specific effect is executed.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the number of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B70 (in the second effect form, the sixth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the fourteenth effect form, the eighteenth effect form, and the twenty-second effect form). Pachinko machine 901),
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a game medium enters each of the plurality of general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the seventeenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol) )When,
Pre-start determination means for performing a pre-start determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied (control to a big hit gaming state based on a big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning) And a game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether or not to perform,
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, an effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state is applied to the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition for the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display start condition is established.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the first effect form to the 24th effect form),
The variable display means includes a start condition (the variable display based on the previous start winning is completed and the big hit gaming state after the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second start winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative design) is variably displayed based on the fact that
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol) )When,
Start time determination means for performing start time determination to determine whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (for the big hit determination stored when starting variable symbol variable display) A game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether to control the jackpot gaming state based on a random number,
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, based on the determination at the start time, an effect of notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state (a change result notice effect) is executed as the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to give more interest to the specific effect by notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B73 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution ratio of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 11th effect form and the 23rd effect form),
The game machine is characterized in that a specific effect is executed in accordance with the frequency of entry of game media into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the frequency of game media entering the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B75 (4th effect form, 8th effect form, 12th effect form, 16th effect form, 20th effect form, 24th effect form pachinko machine 901) Because
A plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D);
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the plurality of general winning areas is a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order in which the game media enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form) Because
There are other winning areas different from the general winning area (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening),
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the order of entry of game media into the general prize area and the order of entry of game media into the other prize areas is a specific order. .
According to this, it is possible to give interest to the order of entry of the game media into the general winning area and other winning areas.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding specific area | region and a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of a production | presentation symbol, and a temporary stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing of each button effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the button production | presentation setting table at the time of high-speed fluctuation | variation, the button production | presentation setting table at the time of reach establishment, and the button production | presentation setting table at the time of success / failure. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a continuous hit button effect setting table and a long press button effect setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation promotion alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the button effect at the time of a hit / fail. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a notification effective period end alert | report. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an operation part effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an operation part production | presentation setting table. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the winning number management table, (b) The figure which shows the winning number information managed by the display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between game hall setting and player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of performing a display setting with the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the winning to a general winning opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of wins to the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each production performed according to a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a fluctuation result notice effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st effect form-a 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th production form-the 8th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th effect form-a 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form-the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form-the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form-the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the number-of-wins information managed by the number-of-wins management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a point provision effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form-the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form-the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form-the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a non-winning alert | report effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form-the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of character AC in the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is a figure which shows the display period of character AC in the 47th effect form-the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th production form-the 49th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each production in the 47th production form and the 48th production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th production form and the 51st production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of continuous hit operation alerting | reporting and cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation alert | report and pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of all the symbol stop operation alerting | reporting, and a chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each announcement effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the number-of-wins information which can be displayed on a 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of a total period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each production | presentation information in the setting which displays winning number information, and the setting which does not display winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on an accessory ratio display apparatus, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. . It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an association / ratio comparison process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a combination / ratio display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired bonuses, and the number of consecutive acquired bonuses. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  When the gaming machine is configured to provide a movable member in the game area, the fourth symbol is displayed in the area where the visual recognition is not hindered in any position of the game area. What is necessary is just to make it comprise so that.

  The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as “4th symbol”, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for 2 special symbols may be collectively referred to as a “4th symbol display area”.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If it is controllable, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the number of rounds per jackpot is the same as in this embodiment. Even if there is, for example, the opening time of the big prize opening per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the big winnings per round and the big winning prize opening per round cannot be expected substantially. If the opening time is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball in the big winning opening, whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the big winning opening. The display color may be different depending on the number of times, and for example, the number of opening of the big winning opening per round is different, so that it is possible to expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening. Even when there is a big hit that cannot be made, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If it is controllable, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the number of rounds per jackpot is the same as in this embodiment. Even if there is, for example, the opening time of the big prize opening per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the big winnings per round and the big winning prize opening per round cannot be expected substantially. If the opening time is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball in the big winning opening, whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the big winning opening. The display color may be different depending on the number of times, and for example, the number of opening of the big winning opening per round is different, so that it is possible to expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening. Even when there is a big hit that cannot be made, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to be.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as “special symbol”, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be referred to as “special symbol indicator (variable display unit”). ) ".

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as “start winning opening” or “start opening”.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail is densely arranged around the first start winning opening 13 and it is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 with respect to the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 13, thereby It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, an area (total pending storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Is provided. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In addition, it replaces with the total pending | holding memory number display part 18c, and it comprises so that the 1st pending memory display part which displays a 1st pending memory number, and the 2nd pending memory display part which displays a 2nd pending memory number may be provided. May be.

  In this embodiment, the summed hold storage display unit 18c shows a case of displaying without distinguishing whether it is a hold display corresponding to the first hold memory or a hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. However, it may be displayed in a distinguishable manner whether it is a hold display corresponding to the first hold memory or a hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. For example, in this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the display is uniformly black without distinguishing between the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory and the hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. In the case of displaying a round display of the above, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed in a black circle display, while the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed in a yellow round display. It may be made distinguishable by displaying. Further, for example, the shape of the hold display may be different between the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided. In this embodiment, it is possible to output the effect sound with at least three types of volume, that is, a low volume, a medium volume, and a high volume. In this embodiment, the frame LED 28 can be lit with at least three colors of white, red, and iridescent.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and effects). The display device 9 shifts to a high base state that is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition on the display device 9 is easily established (in this embodiment, shifts to a time-short state). In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data that the random number circuit 503 updates. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  The effect control means is also connected to a trigger sensor 125, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 provided in the stick controller 122, a vibrator motor 126, and a push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120, as will be described later. However, the illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined effect period (for example, a change period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 9). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) when the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used in the case where the reach is not performed and the pseudo-ream effect is performed. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal P22-3 as normal patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol. Fluctuation patterns of PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 are prepared Yes. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden change is not suddenly a big hit and the effect of the pseudo-ream is used, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, regarding the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability variation big hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped by reach type and divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probable variation big hit, or a sudden probable big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, in the big hit type determination table 131a, five decision values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” (40 minutes). Is determined to be a sudden probability change big hit at a rate of 5), whereas in the big hit type determination table 131b, one determination value is assigned to "sudden probability change big hit" (a ratio of 1/40) Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability variation big hit as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value The first specific gaming state may be determined at a high rate when the first special symbol variation display is executed, and may be determined as a 15-round normal big hit or probable big hit as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect as if the bonus winning opening was additionally started with a bonus after finishing the big hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, there may be provided a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types, “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. However, the number is not limited to three, for example, four or more types. A big hit type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to the short-time state only after the big hit gaming state ends (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time reduction state is ended (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even if the variable display is not finished a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to the probable change state and the short time state also (See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big prize opening is smaller than in “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability change state and also to the short time state. Step S169, which will be described later). (See S170). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  It should be noted that the mode of sudden probability change big hit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as the normal big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and only the opening time of the big prize opening may be made extremely short as 0.1 seconds.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when it is configured so that all the big hit types are probable big hits, it is not necessary to provide the small hits. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you are configured to provide a small hit, suddenly probable big hits that do not involve a short-time state (high base state) just by shifting to a probable state (high probability state). (It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big prize opening is the same in the case of the sudden probability big hit and the small win).

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as “special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command)”. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating the customer waiting demonstration display.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used for “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, and the small hit for “suddenly promiscuous big hit” or “small hit”. / Sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “normal jackpot” or the “probability big hit”. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start winning designation command and the second start winning designation command may be collectively referred to as “start winning designation command”.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total reserved storage number However, the effect control command to be transmitted as the stored storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the change pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (change) and second special display of the effect symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 22), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process in step S312. FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passage process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 14A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 14A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 14 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) ( Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 14B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1216A), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1217A).

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1214B).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. 14B). Step S1215B). In the process of step S1215B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1216B), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1217B).

  15 and 16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last time the variable display was stopped unless the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. Confirm (step S51A). Whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the last time the variable display was stopped is determined by, for example, setting a predetermined timer when the variable display is ended (for example, in a special symbol stop process described later), and in step S51A. This can be determined by checking whether or not this predetermined timer has timed out. If the predetermined period has elapsed since the last time the variable display was stopped, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the process. . For example, when the CPU 56 transmits the customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, the step S51A is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set. , S51B may be controlled not to be executed. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 14A) is “first” data. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In addition, when it is configured to preferentially execute the variable display of the second special symbol as described above, it is not necessary to store the winning order, so the reserved storage specific information storage shown in FIG. An area (pending specific area) is not required.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (a normal state or a short time state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects a big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. (Step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S94). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state or the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends. Specifically, when it is determined to be “ordinary jackpot”, the time reduction flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. In addition, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the hourly flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. Further, when it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, the probability variation flag is set and the time-short flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the next big hit occurs, the time reduction flag is reset together with the probability variation flag.

  If the time flag is not set (N in Step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for detachment during normal time as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern for loss at the time of shortening as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. A type determination table is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state is always set when the state is changed to the probability change state. (Refer to steps S169 and S170), if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the variation pattern type. As a table used for determining one of a plurality of types, a variation pattern type determination table for losing time is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, if the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the loss variation pattern type determination table at the time of shortening Is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table for the time reduction is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later. When the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation in the process of step S102 is performed. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of a shortened change may be performed. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the short time state is different from the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage. However, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). May not display the variation display of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. A variation pattern type determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100, the CPU 56 uses any one of the variation pattern determination tables or the out-of-range variation as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns. A pattern determination table is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 9) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . Then, when neither the “normal big hit” nor the “probable change big hit” (that is, “suddenly probable big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in Step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (Step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probability jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step S135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the hourly number counter that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the timeless state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time for the sudden probability change big hit is set as the opening time of one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, if it is “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is “sudden probable big hit”, small hit / sudden probability big hit An end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit that ends this time is a normal big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (step S169) and sets the time reduction flag to shift to the time reduction state. (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 (including display control of effect symbols) is performed. Execute.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S707).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 using the parallel signal lines. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Instead, for example, the presentation control command data may be output using a serial signal line.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the jackpot start specifying commands (big hit start specifying command, small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start specifying command) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received jackpot start specifying command. A corresponding flag is set (step S622). In this case, for example, if a big hit start designation command (command A001 (H)) is received, the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, and the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is set. If it is received, the small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is any jackpot end designation command (big hit end designation command, small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot end designation command) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received jackpot end designation command. The corresponding jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S628). For example, if the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command, the first start prize designation command reception flag is set. If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command, the second start prize designation command is set. Set the reception flag. Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step S812), and the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801). The value is updated (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is recovered (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read out in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8001). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the design symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by executing the process of step S8001 by the CPU 101 for the effect control. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8001. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. In addition, instead of or in addition to the chance eye symbol, a pseudo-dedicated symbol used only as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-continuous may be provided as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-continuous. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 30, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols arranged with the same even symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, or “8”) with the same three symbols as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of effect symbols arranged in the same odd symbol (“1”, “3”, “5” or “7”) is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol.

  In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol. In addition, a symbol reminiscent of being probabilistic (an odd symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol reminiscent of being in a probable state (even symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probable symbol. Also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation, and the effect mode in the case of executing the effect (step S8003a). If it is determined that the high-speed change button effect is to be executed (Y in step S8003b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined high-speed change button effect effect mode (step S8003c). A high-speed change button effect standby flag indicating that it is decided to execute the change button effect is set (step S8003d).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect button effect, and the effect mode in the case of executing the reach effect (step S8004a). If it is determined to execute the button effect when the reach is established (Y in step S8004b), the CPU 101 for effect control stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the button effect when the reach is established (step S8004c). A reach establishment button effect standby flag is set indicating that it is determined to execute the button effect at the time of establishment (step S8004d).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the hit / impact button effect, and the effect mode in the event of execution (step S8005a). If it is determined that the hit / effect button effect is to be executed (Y in step S8005b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the hit / effect button effect (step S8005c). A hit / drink button effect standby flag indicating that it is decided to execute the button effect during turning is set (step S8005d). In this embodiment, if it is a fluctuation pattern including super reach, a hit / no-go button effect is always executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines the production mode of the continuous hitting button production (step S8006b) if the variation pattern includes the super reach A (Y in step S8006a). If it is determined to execute the repeated hit button effect (Y in step S8006c), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the repeated hit button effect (step S8006d) and executes the repeated hit button effect. A continuous hitting button effect standby flag indicating that it is determined to be performed is set (step S8006e). In this embodiment, if the variation pattern includes super reach A, the repeated hit button effect is always executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the long press button effect (step S8007b) if the variation pattern includes the super reach B (Y in step S8007a). If it is determined to execute the long press button effect (Y in step S8007c), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the long press button effect (step S8007d), and the long press button. A long press button effect standby flag indicating that it is determined to execute the effect is set (step S8007e). In this embodiment, if the variation pattern includes the super reach B, the long press button effect is always executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8008.

  The button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reaching reach, the button effect at the time of hitting, the button-in-progress button effect, and the long-press button effect are accompanied by an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the push button 120, and by the push button 120 during the detection effective period. This is an effect that is executed based on a predetermined operation being performed. Hereinafter, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, the button effect at the time of hitting / unsuccessful, the repeated button effect and the long press button effect are collectively referred to as “button effect”. In this embodiment, “promotion” is not meant to advance the player's operation, but is meant to prompt (invite) the player's operation.

  In the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reaching reach, and the button effect at the time of success / failure, when the detection valid period corresponding to each button effect is started, the effect display device 9 is urged to operate the push button 120. (For example, a first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120 and a second operation promotion image indicating a predetermined character are displayed in any of a plurality of modes.) A) to (D)). Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is detected at least once during the detection valid period, the button effect image at the time of high speed fluctuation, the button effect image at the time of reach establishment, or the button effect image at the time of hitting (for example, a big hit An image suggesting the possibility of becoming) is displayed.

  Moreover, in the repeated hit button effect, when the corresponding detection valid period starts, an operation promotion notification for prompting the repeated hit operation of the push button 120 is performed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 34E). . Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is detected a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the detection valid period (that is, based on the push button 120 being repeatedly hit), the repeated hit button effect image ( For example, an image suggesting the possibility of a big hit, in this example, a serif A image, serif B image, or serif C image (see FIG. 33A) is displayed.

  Also, in the long press button effect, when the corresponding detection valid period starts, the effect display device 9 performs an operation promotion notification for prompting the long press operation of the push button 120 (FIG. 34F). reference). Then, based on the fact that the pressing operation by the push button 120 is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during the detection valid period (that is, based on the long press of the push button 120), A long press button effect image (for example, an image that suggests the possibility of a big hit. In this example, an item A image, an item B image, or an item C image, see FIG. 33B) is displayed.

  Hereinafter, the button effect image at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect image at the time of reaching reach, the button effect image at the time of hitting, the button hit effect image, and the long press button effect image are collectively referred to as “button effect image”. Further, the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 displayed as the operation promotion notification and the second operation promotion image indicating a predetermined character are collectively referred to as an “operation promotion image”.

  In this embodiment, any button effect is executed based on the operation by the push button 120. For example, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is performed by the push button 120. The button effect when the reach is established may be executed based on the operation by the trigger button 121. That is, each button effect may be an effect that is executed when a different operation means is operated.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of each button effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the high-speed fluctuation button effect is executed before the reach state is reached. In addition, the button effect when the reach is established is executed after reaching the reach state. In addition, the hit effect button effect is executed after the start of the hit / impact effect for determining whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31A, the continuous hit button effect is executed before Super Reach A is being executed and the success / failure effect is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the long press button effect is executed while the super reach B is being executed and before the success / failure effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation and the button effect at the time of reach establishment may be executed or not executed even when super reach is executed, Whenever super reach is executed, it is executed. Further, when Super Reach A is executed, a continuous hit button effect is always executed, and when Super Reach B is executed, a long press button effect is always executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and even when super reach is executed, it is possible not to execute the hit effect button effect at a certain rate, or when super reach A is executed. Even so, the continuous hit button effect may not be executed at a constant rate, and even when Super Reach B is executed, the long press button effect may not be executed at a fixed rate.

  The timing for executing each button effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. Further, for example, the timing for executing the button effect may be any timing during the big hit game. In addition, when executing a button effect during a big hit game, based on the detection of a predetermined operation, it may be suggested that the number of rounds is increased or the probability change state or the short time state is controlled after the big hit game. Good.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a button effect setting table at the time of high speed fluctuation, a button effect setting table at the time of reach establishment, and a button effect setting table at the time of hitting / unsuccessful. Moreover, FIG. 33 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous hit button effect setting table and a long press button effect setting table. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation promotion notification.

  In step S8003a, using the high speed variation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32A, whether or not to execute the high speed change button effect is determined ("no effect", " It is determined as one of “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, and “third effect mode”). Note that the determination of “no effect” means that the button effect is not executed at the time of high-speed fluctuation, and any one of the “first effect mode”, the “second effect mode”, and the “third effect mode”. Deciding to do is to decide to execute the button effect at the time of high speed variation in the “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, or “third effect mode” effect mode.

  In the high-speed change button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32A, the determination items (“No effect”, “First effect mode”, “Second effect mode”, and “Third effect mode”) are set for each change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 32A, the ratio of assigned determination values is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for setting the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 32A, the numerical values corresponding to the determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, and “third effect mode”) in each variation pattern are The ratio (%) at which each decision item is selected is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33A, in the case of a fluctuation pattern that does not include super reach (for example, a fluctuation pattern other than super PA3-1 to PA3-4 and super PB3-1 to PB3-4 shown in FIG. 6). ) Is determined not to execute the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation at a rate of 90%, and is determined to execute the button effect at the time of high-speed change at a rate of 10% in the “first effect mode”. Further, when the super reach is lost (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to PA3-2 or super PB3-1 to PB3-2 shown in FIG. 6), a button for high speed variation at a rate of 30%. It is decided not to execute the effect, it is determined that the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation is executed in the “first effect mode” at a rate of 40%, and the button effect at the time of high speed change is set at the “second effect mode” at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be executed, and it is determined that the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed in the “third effect mode” at a rate of 5%. Further, in the case of per super reach (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of super PA3-3 to PA3-4 or super PB3-3 to PB3-4 shown in FIG. 6), a button for high speed variation at a rate of 15%. It is determined not to execute the effect, it is determined that the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation is executed in the “first effect mode” at a rate of 20%, and the button effect at the time of high speed change is set at the “second effect mode” at a rate of 50%. It is determined to be executed, and it is determined that the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation is executed in the “third effect mode” at a rate of 10%.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the high-speed fluctuation button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (A), the reach establishment button effect setting table shown in FIG. 32 (B), the success / failure shown in FIG. 32 (C). A determination value is actually assigned to the hour button effect setting table, the continuous hit button effect setting table shown in FIG. 33A, and the long press button effect setting table shown in FIG. The ratio of the judgment value assigned to be converted into the number is shown. Also in step S8004a, step S8005a, step S8006b, and step S8007b in which these tables are used, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is obtained, as in step S8003a. Decide what is assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation can be executed in the “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, or “third effect mode” effect mode. . In the high-speed fluctuation button effect, the small button image (hereinafter referred to as the first operation promotion) of the first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120 as the operation promotion notification in any effect mode. An image (also referred to as a small image) is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (small) 201a in FIG. 34A). In addition, when an operation is detected within the detection effective period, the “first effect mode” displays the first high-speed fluctuating button effect image indicating the characters “...” And “the second effect mode”. Then, the second high-speed change button effect image indicating the character “?” Is displayed, and the third high-speed change button effect image indicating the character “!” Is displayed in the “third effect mode”. Hereinafter, the first high-speed change button effect image, the second high-speed change button effect image, and the third high-speed change button effect image may be collectively referred to as “high-speed change button effect image”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32B, in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of reach establishment can be executed in the “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, or “third effect mode” effect mode. It is. In reach effect button production, medium-sized medium button images (hereinafter referred to as first operation promotion) of the first operation promotion images simulating the appearance of the push button 120 as operation promotion notifications in any production mode. An image (also referred to as middle) is displayed (see the first operation promoting image (middle) 201b in FIG. 34B). When an operation is detected within the detection effective period, a button effect image at the time of establishment of the first reach indicating the character “chance!” Is displayed in the “first effect mode”, and in the “second effect mode” A button effect image at the time of establishment of the second reach indicating the character “Opportunity!” Is displayed, and a button effect image at the time of establishment of the third reach indicating the character “hot” is displayed in the “third effect mode”. Hereinafter, the button effect image when the first reach is established, the button effect image when the second reach is established, and the button effect image when the third reach is established may be collectively referred to as a “button effect image when the reach is established”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32C, in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of success / failure can be executed in an effect mode of “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, or “third effect mode”. It is. In the “first effect mode” of the button effect at the time of success or failure, a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) is displayed as the operation promotion notification (see FIG. 34B), and “second effect mode” Then, as the operation promotion notification, a large button image (hereinafter also referred to as a first operation promotion image (large)) of the first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120 and a predetermined character are shown. Among the second operation promotion images, a second operation promotion image (press) indicating the character of “press” is displayed (first operation promotion image (large) 201c, second operation promotion image (FIG. 34C) ( 202a)), in the “third effect mode”, as the operation promotion notification, “one blow” out of the large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character. And a second operation promotion image (a blow) showing the characters of (First operation promoting image (large) 201c in FIG. 34 (D), the second operating promoting image (blow) see 202b). In addition, when an operation is detected within the detection valid period, a hit effect button effect image corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed. In this example, when the display result is out of place, a first hit / fail button effect image (see first hit / fail button effect image 204a in FIG. 42 (D1)) indicating the character "defeat ..." is displayed. When the display result is a big hit, a second win / fail button effect image (refer to the second win / fail button effect image 204b in FIG. 42 (D2)) indicating the character “Victory!” Is displayed. In the following, the first win / fail button effect image and the second hit / fail button effect image may be collectively referred to as “win / fail button effect image”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33A, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the continuous hit button effect in the “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, or “third effect mode” effect mode. . In the continuous hit button effect, in any effect mode, as the operation promotion notification, the “continuous hit” of the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the second operation promotion image indicating a predetermined character is displayed. Are displayed (see the first operation promotion image (small) 201a and the second operation promotion image (continuous hit) 202c in FIG. 34E). In addition, when a continuous hitting operation is detected within the detection effective period, a serif A image (also referred to as a first hitting button effect image) is displayed in the “first effect mode”, and a serif B in the “second effect mode”. An image (also referred to as a second consecutive hit button effect image) is displayed, and in the “third effect mode”, a serif C image (also referred to as a third consecutive hit button effect image) is displayed. Hereinafter, the first consecutive button effect image, the second consecutive button effect image, and the third consecutive button effect image may be collectively referred to as “continuous button effect image”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), in this embodiment, the long press button effect can be executed in the “first effect mode”, “second effect mode”, or “third effect mode” effect mode. is there. In the long press button effect, in any effect mode, as the operation promotion notification, the “long” of the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the second operation promotion image indicating a predetermined character is displayed. The second operation promotion image (long press) indicating the character “press” is displayed (see the first operation promotion image (small) 201a and the second operation promotion image (long press) 202d in FIG. 34F). When a long press operation is detected within the detection valid period, the item A image (also referred to as the first long press button effect image) is displayed in the “first effect mode”, and the “second effect mode”. An item B image (also referred to as a second long press button effect image) is displayed, and an item C image (also referred to as a third long press button effect image) is displayed in the “third effect mode”. Hereinafter, the first long push button effect image, the second long press button effect image, and the third long press button effect image may be collectively referred to as “long press button effect image”.

  In each button effect setting table shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C, what is characteristic is that the variation pattern including the super reach is different from the variation pattern not including the super reach, and the display result is different. Is determined so that the ratio determined as “first effect mode”, “second effect mode” or “third effect mode” is higher, and the rate determined as “no effect” is lower. The value is set. Furthermore, the ratio of the display result that is a big hit rather than the loss is higher than the “first effect mode” and the “second effect mode” and the “third effect mode” are determined to be higher. The determination value is set so that By providing such a feature, the “second effect mode” and the “second effect” are more effective when the effect is executed than when the effect is not executed. When it is executed in the “third effect mode” rather than the “mode”, the ratio of the effect pattern variation mode (for example, developing to super reach) is increased, and the display result is a big hit. The ratio can be increased. That is, the “second effect mode” and the “third effect mode” are more effective than the “first effect mode”. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reaching reach, and the button effect at the time of success / failure, and in which effect mode is executed It can be noticed.

  In addition, what is characteristic in the repeated hit button effect setting table and the long press button effect setting table shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (B) is that “the first effect mode” means that the display result is a big hit rather than a loss. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the “third effect mode” is higher than the “second effect mode” and the “second effect mode”. By having such a feature, the display is performed when the “second effect mode” is executed rather than the “second effect mode” than the “first effect mode”. The rate at which the result is a big hit can be increased. That is, the “second effect mode” and the “third effect mode” are more effective than the “first effect mode”. Therefore, attention can be paid to which aspect of the continuous hit button effect and the long press button effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, a first pattern that displays only the first operation promotion image that imitates the appearance of the push button 120, and a second pattern that displays the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image indicating a predetermined character. The operation promotion notification can be executed. Specifically, in the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure, the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern, and in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern. As already described, in this embodiment, the second production mode and the third production mode are configured to have higher expectation than the first production mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation is higher when the operation promotion notification is performed in the second pattern than in the first pattern. By configuring in this way, attention can be paid to which pattern is used for the operation promotion notification. Further, in the operation promotion notification by the first pattern, only the first operation promotion image is displayed, and in the operation promotion notification by the second pattern, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image are displayed. As the number of images increases, the degree of expectation increases, and the degree of expectation can be shown to the player in an easily understandable manner. Note that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and the first pattern operation promotion notification may be configured to have higher expectation than the second pattern operation promotion notification.

  In this embodiment, the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Specifically, any of a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)), a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)), and a large button image (first operation promotion image (large)). The middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) is displayed in the first effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure, and the large button is displayed in the second effect mode and the third effect mode. An image (first operation promotion image (large)) is displayed. Then, the degree of expectation varies depending on which of the first modes of the plurality of modes is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give interest to the aspect of the first operation promotion image, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In this embodiment, the second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character can also be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Specifically, the second operation promotion image (pressing) is displayed in the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure, and the second operation promotion image (stroke) is displayed in the third effect mode. Then, also about a 2nd operation promotion image, an expectation differs according to which of the some aspects was displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give interest also to the aspect of the second operation promotion image, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In this embodiment, since the first operation promotion image and the second promotion image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, the operation promotion notification by the second pattern is executed in any of the plurality of modes. It can be said that it can be done. Specifically, in the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure, the operation is promoted by the second pattern by displaying the large button image (first operation promoting image (large)) and the second operation promoting image (pressing). Notification is performed, and in the third effect mode, operation promotion notification by the second pattern is performed by displaying a large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and a second operation promotion image (stroke). As a result, the degree of expectation varies depending on which of the second patterns of the plurality of modes the operation promotion notification is performed. By comprising in this way, it can be made interested also by which aspect the operation promotion alerting | reporting by a 2nd pattern is performed, and a production effect can be heightened.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation promotion notification is performed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different rate depending on the timing at which the button effect is executed (that is, the timing at which the operation promotion notification is performed). It is configured. Specifically, at the timing when the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed and when the button effect at the time of reaching reach is executed, the operation promotion is notified by the first pattern at a rate of 100%, When the display result is out of order at the timing when the operation is executed, the operation promotion notification is given by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 30%) at a rate of 70%, and the display result is a big hit The operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern at the rate of 35% (the second pattern at the rate of 65%). Then, in this embodiment, as the operation promotion notification is performed at a later timing, the ratio performed by the second pattern is higher and the expectation is higher. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give interest to the timing at which the operation promotion notification is performed, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. It should be noted that not only the example shown in FIG. 32 but also the operation promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation or the button effect at the time of reaching reach is executed. It may be configured.

  In this embodiment, the timing to be executed for each button effect is determined, but for example, it is possible to execute the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation at several timings during the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, or the reach is established. When a button effect at the time of reach establishment is made executable at a plurality of later timings, the first pattern and the second pattern are different at different rates depending on the timing at which the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation or the button effect at the time of reach establishment is executed. The operation promotion notification may be performed by either of the above. Even in such a configuration, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the operation promotion notification is performed by either the first pattern or the second pattern (for example, the rate at which the display result is a big hit varies). It may be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the button effect at the time of reach establishment, and the button effect at the time of success / failure are executed based on the pressing operation of the push button 120 once during the detection valid period. In contrast, the continuous hit button effect is executed based on the continuous operation of the push button 120 during the detection effective period, and the long press button effect is performed by the long press operation of the push button 120 during the effective detection period. It is executed on the basis of what has been broken. Therefore, in the case of a continuous hit button effect, a second operation promotion image (continuous hitting) that prompts a continuous hit operation is displayed together with the first operation promotion image as an operation promotion notification. Along with the operation promotion image, a second operation promotion image (long press) that prompts a long press operation is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show necessary operations in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  In this embodiment, one type of operation promotion notification mode is provided for each of the repeated button effect and the long press button effect, but a plurality of modes may be provided. For example, the operation promotion notification of the continuous hit button effect may be executable by a mode in which the first operation promotion image (middle) and the second operation promotion image (continuous hit) are displayed. Also in this case, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the mode of operation promotion notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, whether or not to execute each button effect is divided into three types: a variation pattern that does not include super reach, a variation pattern that deviates from super reach, and a variation pattern that per super reach. However, the method of dividing the variation pattern is not limited to this. For example, among fluctuation patterns that do not include super reach, change patterns that do not include reach, fluctuation patterns that include normal reach, and fluctuation patterns that include normal reach, such as those that display results are hit or fall out. Thus, whether or not to execute each button effect may be determined. In addition, regarding the variation pattern including super reach, whether or not to execute each button effect is determined according to the type of super reach (in this example, super reach A or super reach B). You may make it do.

  For example, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31B, and even if the variation pattern does not include super reach, each button effect may be executable at a certain rate as long as the variation pattern includes normal reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, whether or not each button effect is executed is divided into two types of super reach A deviation (super reach B deviation) and super reach A (per super reach B). Although the production mode has been determined, the method of dividing the variation pattern is not limited to this as described above. That is, even in the case of a variation pattern other than Super Reach A or Super Reach B, it is possible to execute a continuous hit button effect or a long press button effect.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31C, and it is also possible not to execute the hit / no-go button effect at a certain rate even when the super reach is lost or per super reach. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32A, and the repeated hit button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even when the super reach A is out of position or per super reach A. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 32B, and the long press button effect may not be executed at a constant rate even when the super reach B is out of place or the super reach B is reached.

  In this embodiment, the player's action is detected based on whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected. Alternatively, the player's motion may be detected by a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor. In addition, in this case, the operation promotion notification mode illustrated in FIG. 34 is not limited, and for example, an image imitating the appearance of the stick controller 122 and an image indicating “shrink” are displayed, or a hand is held over the sensor. The operation promotion notification may be performed by displaying an image simulating the state and an image indicating the character “Hold Your Hand”. Further, in this case, the player's action that triggers the performance may be different according to the degree of expectation. For example, an effect that is executed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 at the time of hitting is made to have a higher expectation than an effect that is executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120. May be.

  In addition to the example of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 34, for example, together with a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)), “press” An operation promotion notification for displaying a second operation promotion image indicating characters such as “blow” may be performed. In this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the combination of the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image. For example, the operation promotion notification in which the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed rather than the operation promotion notification in which only the first operation promotion image (small) is displayed. Furthermore, the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (stroke) are displayed rather than the operation promotion notification in which the first operation promotion image (small) and the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed. The operation promotion notification may be expected to have a higher degree of expectation.

  Further, for example, when the operation promotion notification is performed in a specific manner, the big hit may be determined. Specifically, when a specific first operation promotion image (for example, an image simulating a golden push button 120) is displayed, a specific second operation promotion image (for example, “PUSH!” Is shown). When the image is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. In addition, when displayed alone, the jackpot is not confirmed, but an operation promotion notification may be performed in which the jackpot is confirmed when displayed in combination. Specifically, when only the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) is displayed, the big hit is not confirmed, but the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and the second operation are not determined. When a promotion image (a blow) is displayed (when a combination with a high degree of rarity is displayed), a big hit may be determined.

  Moreover, even if it is the operation promotion alert | report of the same aspect, you may make it expectation differ according to the timing performed. Specifically, the operation promotion notification for displaying the small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) has a low degree of expectation when performed at high speed fluctuation, but the degree of expectation increases when performed at the time of hitting or not ( For example, the jackpot is determined).

  In step S8008 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S8008), and starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8009).

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 35 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In this embodiment, each button effect is realized by executing a predetermined process (for example, a process in steps S8106 to S8175 described later) in the effect symbol changing process. Regardless of whether or not is executed, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected in step S8008. Scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence / absence of each button effect may be stored in advance, and each button effect may be realized by executing processing based on the data. However, with the configuration of this embodiment, each button effect can be realized while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

  Also, in this embodiment, the case where each button effect can be executed as a changing effect will be described. It may be determined whether or not to execute, and the notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. If it is determined to execute such a notice effect, a process table corresponding to the notice effect may be selected in step S8008. That is, scenario data (corresponding to the process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each notice effect is stored in advance, and the notice effect is realized by executing processing based on the data. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S8010). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8011).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8012).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  FIG. 36 to FIG. 40 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the high-speed change button effect valid flag indicating that the high-speed change button effect detection effective period is in effect is set (step S8106). When the high speed variation button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8113.

  When the high-speed change button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high-speed change button effect standby flag is set (step S8107). If the high-speed fluctuation button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  When the high-speed change button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the high-speed change button effect (that is, the detection effective period start timing of the high-speed change button effect). Confirmation is made (step S8108). When it is not the start timing of the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  If it is the start timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, that is, the detection effective period start timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect standby flag at the time of high-speed fluctuation (step S8109). At the same time, a high-speed fluctuation button effect valid flag is set (step 8110). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 displays a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) as an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9 and the remaining period of the detection effective period. Is displayed (steps S8111 and S8112). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8113.

  In this embodiment, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period, the remaining effective period image in which the ratio of the indication area in the meter display area is different is updated and displayed so that the remaining period of the detection effective period is indicated. It is configured. That is, the meter display area in the remaining effective period image indicates the entire detection effective period, and the instruction area indicates the remaining period of the detection effective period. Specifically, when the detection effective period is started, the remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period image 203 shown in FIG. 43A1) in which the instruction area occupies the entire area of the meter display area. The remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period shown in FIG. 43B1) in which the proportion of the indication area in the meter display area is reduced in accordance with the decrease in the remaining period of the detected effective period. When the image 203) is displayed and the detection effective period ends (or when a predetermined operation is detected), the remaining effective period image (for example, FIG. The remaining effective period image 203) shown in C1) is displayed. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining period of the detected effective period by confirming the state of the remaining effective period image. In this embodiment, the remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period image 203 shown in FIG. 43 (C1)) in which the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is 0 is also referred to as the effective period end image. By displaying the effective period end image, the detection effective period end notification for notifying that the detection effective period has ended is performed.

  In step S813, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8113). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines, in the effect display device 9, in the effect symbol variation start process, and in accordance with the stored high speed variation button effect effect mode. Control to display a button effect image at the time of change (for example, “...”, “?” Or “!”, See FIG. 32A) is performed (step S 8114). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8114a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed operation promotion image (step S8115). Further, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 as a detection effective period end notification for notifying that the detection effective period has ended, for example, when the effective period end image (for example, the indication area shown in FIG. The remaining effective period image 203) whose ratio to the display area is 0 is displayed (step S8116). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the high speed variation button effect valid flag (step S8117). The button effect image at the time of high-speed fluctuation and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period. For example, a timer is set when displaying a button effect image at the time of high-speed fluctuation or a valid period end image, and when the predetermined time is counted by the timer, control is performed to delete the button effect image at the time of high-speed fluctuation or the valid period end image Is realized.

  If the operation of the push button 120 is not detected in step S8113, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation (that is, the detection effective period end timing of the button effect at the time of high-speed change). Whether or not (step S8118). If it is the end timing of the high-speed fluctuation button effect, the process proceeds to step S8115. If it is not the end timing of the button effect during high-speed fluctuation, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image in accordance with the remaining period of the detected effective period (step S8119). For example, a remaining effective period image in which the proportion of the indication area in the meter display area is reduced in accordance with the decrease in the remaining period (see FIG. 43 (B1)). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  In step S8120, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a reach establishment button effect valid flag indicating that a reach establishment button effect detection valid period is in effect is set (step S8120). When the reach establishment button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  When the reach establishment button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the reach establishment button effect standby flag is set (step S8121). When the reach establishment button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When the reach effect button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the reach effect button effect start timing (that is, the reach enable button effect detection effective period start timing). Confirmation is made (step S8122). If it is not the start timing of the button production when reach is established, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When it is the start timing of the button effect at the time of reach establishment, that is, when it is the detection valid period start timing of the button effect at the time of reach establishment, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect standby flag at the time of reach establishment (step S8123). At the same time, a button effect valid flag is set when reach is established (step 8124). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 displays a middle button image (first operation promotion image (middle)) and a remaining effective period image as an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9. Control is performed (steps S8125 and S8126). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  In step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8127). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines the reach in the effect symbol change start process in the effect display device 9 and stores the reach according to the effect mode of the reach establishment button effect. Control is performed to display a button effect image (for example, “chance!”, “Opportunity!” Or “extreme heat!” (See FIG. 32B)) when established (step S8128). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8128a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8129). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended on the effect display device 9 (step S8130). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect valid flag when reach is established (step S8131). It should be noted that the button effect at the time of reach establishment and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  If the operation of the push button 120 is not detected in step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 indicates the end timing of the reach effect button effect (that is, the reach effective button effect detection effective period end timing). Whether or not (step S8132). And if it is the completion timing of button production at the time of reach establishment, it will transfer to step S8129. If the reach timing is not the end timing of the button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image in accordance with the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8133). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  In step S8134, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hit / non-attend button effect valid flag indicating that the hit / non-attend button effect is being detected is valid (step S8134). If the hit / non-attend button effect valid flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8141.

  In the case where the success / failure button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the success / failure button effect standby flag is set (step S8135). If the hit / non-attend button effect standby flag is not set, then the flow shifts to step S8148.

  In the case where the success / failure button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the success / failure button effect (that is, the detection effective period start timing of the success / failure button effect). Confirmation is made (step S8136). If it is not the start timing of the hit / no-effect button effect, the process moves to step S8148.

  When it is the start timing of the button effect at the time of success / failure, that is, when the detection effective period start timing of the button effect at the time of success / failure is reached, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button effect standby flag at the time of success / failure (step S8137). At the same time, a hit effect button effect valid flag is set (step 8138). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 displays the operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 as an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the push button 120 (for example, a middle button image (first operation promotion image). (Middle)) only, large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and second operation promotion image (press) are displayed, or large button image (first operation promotion image (large)) and first 2 operation promotion images (one blow) are displayed) and the remaining effective period images are displayed (steps S8139 and S8140). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8141.

  In step S8141, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8141). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display device 9 in the effect symbol variation start process, and determines whether or not the effect is determined according to the effect mode of the hit effect at the time of hitting and stored. Button effect image at the time of hitting (for example, a first hit effect button effect image 204a indicating the character of “defeat ...”, or a second hit / not hit button effect image 204b indicating the character of “win!” FIG. 42 (D1). , (D2)) is displayed (step S8142). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8142a). Note that, instead of or in addition to the example shown in this embodiment, in the process of step S8142, a predetermined movable combination is operated in the case of a big hit, and in the case of a loss, a predetermined movable combination is operated. You may make things not operate. In addition, for example, when it is a big hit (or when it is a probable big hit), a predetermined movable accessory is operated by the first pattern, and when it is out of place (or when it is a normal big hit), a predetermined movable The accessory may be operated in a second pattern different from the first pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8143). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended in the effect display device 9 (step S8144). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the hit / effect button effect valid flag (step S8145). The hit effect button effect image and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  If the operation of the push button 120 is not detected in step S8141, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the hit / effect button effect (that is, the detection effective period end timing of the hit / effect button effect). It is confirmed whether or not (step S8146). Then, if it is the end timing of the hit / effect button effect, the process proceeds to step S8143. If it is not the end timing of the button effect at the time of success / failure, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image in accordance with the remaining period of the detected effective period (step S8147). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8148.

  In step S8148, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a continuous hit button effect valid flag indicating that it is during the detection valid period of the repeat button effect is set (step S8148). If the continuous hitting button effect valid flag is set, the process moves to step S8155.

  When the continuous hit button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the continuous hit button effect standby flag is set (step S8149). If the continuous hitting button effect standby flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If the repeated hit button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the repeated hit button effect (that is, the detection valid period start timing of the repeated hit button effect) (step S8150). . If it is not the start timing of the continuous hit button effect, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  When it is the start timing of the continuous hit button effect, that is, when it is the detection effective period start timing of the continuous hit button effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous hit button effect standby flag (step S8151) and at the same time the continuous hit button effect is valid. A flag is set (step 8152). In addition, in the effect display device 9, the effect control CPU 101 uses a small button image (first operation promoting image (small)) and a second operation promoting image (continuous hit) as operation promotion notifications that prompt the user to operate the push button 120. And a control for displaying the remaining effective period image (steps S8153 and S8154). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8155.

  In step S8155, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8155). When the continuous operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start processing in the effect display device 9 and according to the effect mode of the stored continuous button effect stored, Control for displaying an effect image (for example, a serif A image, serif B image or serif C image; see FIG. 33A) is performed (step S8156). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8156a).

  In step S8155, whether or not the continuous operation of the push button 120 is detected is determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the operation detection signal is received from the push sensor 124 a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. . In addition, the effect display device 9 may perform meter display or the like according to the number of operations so that the number of times the push button 120 is operated within the detection valid period of the continuous hit button effect can be recognized. By configuring in this way, the meter value increases each time the operation is performed, so that the player can realize the effect of the continuous hitting operation and can improve the effect. Moreover, in the structure which displays a meter, for example, a lottery may be performed every time the push button 120 is operated, and the meter value may be increased when winning (for example, winning at a rate of 1/10). Further, for example, the jackpot may be determined when the meter value reaches the maximum value as a result of the continuous hitting operation. In this case, when the display result is not a big hit, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90% of the maximum value), the meter value is not increased or the lottery is not won even if the pressing operation is performed. What is necessary is just to comprise. It is desirable to provide a case where the meter value does not reach the maximum value even when the display result is a big hit. By doing in this way, even if the meter value does not reach the maximum value, the possibility of a big hit remains and the interest can be enhanced. Further, the meter display by the repeated hit button effect may be utilized for the hit / no effect effect or the hit / effect button effect performed after the repeat hit button effect. For example, it may be possible to execute a hit / no-go effect or a hit / no-go button effect incorporating a meter display by a continuous hit button effect, or when the meter value is higher, the expectation or rarity is higher or worse A button effect may be executed. By comprising in this way, the relevance between effects can be raised and an effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the repeated hit button effect is configured such that the repeated hit button effect image is displayed when the push button 120 is operated a predetermined number of times within the detected effective period. It may be configured such that a lottery is performed every time the push button 120 is operated and a lottery button effect image is displayed when the lottery is won (for example, at a rate of 1/100). In other words, in order to increase the number of lotteries and increase the possibility of winning, it may be an effect that makes it advantageous to hit the push button 120 repeatedly.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8157). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended on the effect display device 9 (step S8158). Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the continuous hitting button production effective flag (step S8159). Note that the continuous hit button effect image and the valid period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  If it is determined in step S8155 that the continuous operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the continuous hit button effect (that is, the detection effective period end timing of the continuous hit button effect). Is confirmed (step S8160). If it is the end timing of the continuous hit button effect, the process proceeds to step S8157. If it is not the end timing of the repeated button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detected effective period (step S8161). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  In step S8162, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the long press button effect valid flag indicating that the long press button effect detection valid period is being set (step S8162). If the long press button effect valid flag is set, then the flow shifts to step S8169.

  If the long push button effect valid flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the long press button effect standby flag is set (step S8163). If the long press button effect standby flag is not set, then the flow shifts to step S8176.

  When the long press button effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the long press button effect (that is, the detection effective period start timing of the long press button effect) ( Step S8164). If it is not the start timing of the long press button effect, the process moves to step S8176.

  When it is the start timing of the long press button effect, that is, when the detection effective period start timing of the long press button effect is reached, the effect control CPU 101 resets the long press button effect standby flag (step S8165) and long A push button effect valid flag is set (step 8166). In addition, in the effect display device 9, the effect control CPU 101 uses a small button image (first operation promotion image (small)) and a second operation promotion image (long press) as operation promotion notifications that prompt the user to operate the push button 120. And a control to display the remaining effective period image (steps S8167 and S8168). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  In step S8169, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a long press operation of the push button 120 is detected (step S8169). When the long press operation of the push button 120 is detected, the CPU 101 for effect control is determined in the effect symbol variation start process in the effect display device 9 and is stored according to the effect mode of the stored long press button effect. Control to display a long press button effect image (for example, item A image, item B image or item C image, see FIG. 33B) is performed (step S8170). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8170a).

  In step S8169, whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 has been detected is determined by, for example, continuously receiving the operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 for a predetermined period (shorter than the detection valid period). This is done by checking whether or not. For example, it is determined whether or not the long press operation of the push button 120 has been detected. Whether or not the total of the press operations within the detection effective period has reached a predetermined period (shorter than the detection effective period). You may make it carry out by confirming. In addition, the effect display device 9 performs meter display or the like corresponding to the long press operation period so that the long press operation period of the push button 120 can be recognized within the long press button effect detection effective period. You may do it. For example, when the long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the meter display is performed so that the meter value corresponding to 10% of the whole scale increases. By configuring in this way, the meter value increases when the long press operation is continued, so that the player can realize the effect of the long press operation and improve the effect. For example, in the second half of the detection valid period, when the long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the meter value corresponding to 20% of the full scale may be increased on the meter display, or the long press operation is 0. When it is performed for 2 seconds, the meter value corresponding to 10% of the whole scale in the meter display may be increased. Thus, the meter value can be easily increased within the detection effective period by increasing the increase rate of the meter value during the specific period of the detection effective period. Further, for example, the jackpot may be determined when the meter value reaches the maximum value as a result of the long press operation. In this case, when the display result is not a big hit, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90% of the maximum value), the meter value may be configured not to increase even if a long press operation is performed. . It is desirable to provide a case where the meter value does not reach the maximum value even when the display result is a big hit. By doing in this way, even if the meter value does not reach the maximum value, the possibility of a big hit remains and the interest can be enhanced. Further, the meter display by the long press button effect may be used for the hit / no effect effect or the hit / effect button effect performed after the long press button effect. For example, it may be possible to execute a hit / no-go effect incorporating a meter display by a long press button effect or a hit / no-go button effect, and a higher meter value may result in a higher or lower expectation / rare / no-go effect. An hour button effect may be executed. By comprising in this way, the relevance between effects can be raised and an effect can be improved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8171). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended in the effect display device 9 (step S8172). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the long press button effect valid flag (step S8173). The long press button effect image and the effective period end image are deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8169, when the long press operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the long press button effect (that is, the detection effective period end timing of the long press button effect). It is confirmed whether or not (step S8174). If it is the end timing of the long press button effect, the process proceeds to step S8171. If it is not the end timing of the long press button effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image in accordance with the remaining period of the detected effective period (step S8175). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  In step S8176, if the variation time timer has timed out (Y in step S8176), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) ( Step S8177).

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined operation is performed until the detection valid period ends by executing the processes of steps S8116, S8130, S8144, S8158, and S8172 in the effect symbol variation process. However, since the detection valid period end notification is performed, it can be easily recognized that the detection valid period has ended based on the operation.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, after the button effect image is displayed, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are deleted, and the effective period end image is displayed (for example, step). S8114 to S8116), for example, the button effect image may be displayed after deleting the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image and displaying the effective period end image.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are configured to be deleted at the end timing of the button effect detection effective period, but the predetermined period of the end timing of the button effect detection effective period Before the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image (or only one of them) may be deleted. With this configuration, the operation performed at the timing when the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are erased is not detected as an operation within the detection effective period, and the player is distrusted. Can be avoided.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Without proceeding to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if it is not set, the process ends.

  If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b). In addition, control is performed to confirm and display the stop symbols (outlier symbol, jackpot symbol) of the determined effect symbols (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the presentation control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311. To do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (a jackpot start designation command reception flag), This determination can be made by checking whether or not a flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag) is set. If any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8307). Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the button effect at the time of hitting / unsuccessful. FIGS. 42A1 to 42E1 show a specific example in the case where the hit effect button effect according to the first effect mode is executed when the display result is out of place.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A1), when a hit / no-go effect (for example, an effect of fighting an enemy character) is started on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the change display of the effect symbol in the reach state is displayed at the lower left. It is displayed in a reduced size.

  Next, when the detection validity period of the button effect (first effect mode) is determined, the first operation promotion image (middle) 201b (middle button image) is displayed as the operation promotion notification. Further, the remaining effective period image 203 indicating the remaining period of the detected effective period is displayed (FIG. 42 (B1)). In the remaining effective period image 203, the indication area indicating the remaining period (corresponding to the blacked area in the example of FIG. 42) corresponds to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period). It is updated so that the ratio to the number decreases (FIG. 42 (C1)).

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the first hit / fail button effect image 204a indicating the character “defeat ...” is displayed, and the final stop symbol (“6” that becomes a loss symbol) is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. At this time, the first operation promotion image (middle) 201b (middle button image) and the remaining valid period image 203 are deleted, and the valid period end image (ratio of the indication area in the meter display area) is notified as the detection valid period end notification. Is displayed (FIG. 42 (D1)).

  Thereafter, the first win / fail button effect image 204a and the effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the indication area occupies the meter display area is 0) are deleted, and in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9, The off symbol “767” is stopped and displayed (FIG. 42 (E1)).

  FIGS. 42 (A2) to (E2) show specific examples in the case of performing a hit / fail button effect in the third effect mode when the display result is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A2), when a hit / no-go effect (for example, an effect of fighting an enemy character) is started on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the change display of the effect symbol in the reach state is displayed at the lower left. It is displayed in a reduced size.

  Next, when the detection validity period of the hit effect button effect (third effect mode) is started, as the operation promotion notification, the first operation promotion image (large) 201c (large button image) and the second operation promotion image (one blow) ) 202b is displayed. Further, the remaining effective period image 203 indicating the remaining period of the detected effective period is displayed (FIG. 42 (B2)). In the remaining effective period image 203, the indication area indicating the remaining period (corresponding to the blacked area in the example of FIG. 42) corresponds to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period). It is updated so that the ratio to the number decreases (FIG. 42 (C2)).

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the second win / fail button effect image 204b indicating the characters “Victory!” Is displayed, and the final stop symbol (“7” which becomes a big hit symbol) is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. At this time, the first operation promotion image (large) 201c (large button image), the second operation promotion image (stroke) 202b, and the remaining effective period image 203 are erased, and the effective period end image is used as the detection effective period end notification. (Remaining effective period image 203 in which the indication area occupies the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 42 (D2)).

  Thereafter, the second win / fail button effect image 204b and the effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the indication area occupies 0 in the meter display area) are deleted, and in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9, The jackpot symbol “777” is stopped and displayed (FIG. 42 (E2)).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the detection valid period end notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to (C1), when the effective detection period is started, operation promotion notification is performed on the effect display device 9 (for example, the first operation promotion image ( Middle) 201b) and the remaining detection effective period image 203 is displayed (FIG. 43 (A1)). Further, in the remaining effective period image 203, the indication area indicating the remaining period (corresponding to the blacked area in the example of FIG. 43) corresponds to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period). It is updated so that the ratio to the number decreases (FIG. 43 (B1)).

  When an operation is detected, the effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is 0) is immediately displayed (FIG. 43 (C1)).

  On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 43A2 to 43D2, when an operation is detected, the effective period end image is not displayed immediately, but the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area is The remaining effective period image 203 that suddenly decreases is displayed (FIG. 43 (C2)). After that, an effective period end image (the remaining effective period image 203 in which the ratio of the instruction area to the meter display area is 0) is displayed (FIG. 43 (D2)). By performing display that rapidly decreases the ratio of the instruction area, the player can easily recognize the change in the meter display area. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the detection valid period is ended by the operation, and can also recognize that the operation is completed (the pressing operation of the push button 120 is detected).

  The display in which the ratio of the instruction area in the meter display area rapidly decreases may be realized by, for example, reproducing a moving image prepared in advance. Moreover, the speed at which the ratio of the indication area is rapidly reduced is arbitrary. It is sufficient that the player can recognize that the instruction area is faster than the speed at which the instruction area decreases when no operation is detected.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, an effect that changes the mode of the push button 120 according to the degree of expectation may be executable. For example, the push button 120 includes a white LED, a red LED, and a vibrator (vibration motor). The push button 120 is formed so that a player can visually recognize the color of the white LED and the red LED, and vibrates when the vibrator operates. And Hereinafter, the effect of changing the mode of the push button 120 is also referred to as an operation unit effect. When performing the operation unit effect, a notification is made to prompt the user to operate the push button 120. When the operation of the push button 120 is detected (or when the detection valid period elapses), the mode of the push button 120 is changed to the normal state. You may make it return.

  Further, the operation unit effect and each button effect may be executed in combination. Specifically, when the button effect detection effective period is started, the mode of the push button 120 is changed by the operation unit effect, and the operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display device 9 by the operation promotion notification. When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect display device 9 displays the button effect image and deletes the operation promotion image, and the mode of the push button 120 is returned to the normal state.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the operation unit effect. FIG. 44A shows a case where the operation promotion notification is performed without performing the operation unit effect, and FIG. 44B shows a case where the operation unit notification is performed while the operation promotion notification is performed.

  When the operation promotion notification is performed without performing the operation unit effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the effect control CPU 101 performs the operation promotion image (for example, the first operation promotion) as the button effect operation promotion notification. Control is performed to display the image (small) 201a) on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  On the other hand, when performing the operation section effect and performing the operation promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the effect control CPU 101 uses the operation promotion image (for example, the first operation) as the button effect operation promotion notification. Control for displaying the promotion image (small) 201a) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and control for changing the mode of the push button 120 from the normal mode as the operation unit effect.

  The normal mode of the push button 120 is a state in which no color is developed (white LED and red LED are turned off) and vibration by the vibrator is not performed. Therefore, when changing the mode of the push button 120 from the normal mode, the effect control CPU 101 performs color development by the white LED, color development by the red LED, vibration by the vibrator, or control of two or more of them. .

  In the configuration capable of executing the operation unit effect, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process, it is determined whether or not the operation unit effect is to be executed. decide. The operation promotion notification mode and the operation unit effect mode are determined using, for example, an operation unit effect setting table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the operation unit effect setting table. As shown in FIG. 45, in the operation unit effect determination table, there is a determination value corresponding to a combination of the mode of the operation promotion image displayed by the operation promotion notification and the mode of the push button 120 after the change by the operation unit effect. Is set. Note that FIG. 45 shows an example in which the first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120 is displayed in different colors / sizes as the operation promotion image. FIG. 45 shows the number of determination values.

  For example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the button effect in the effect symbol variation start process, the mode of the first operation promotion image and the mode of the push button 120 after the change are changed to the value of the operation unit effect determination random number. The mode corresponding to the determination value that matches is determined. When it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is not to be a big hit symbol (to make it off), the effect control CPU 101 uses the table shown in FIG. If it is decided to use the table shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the ratio that the mode of the push button 120 is determined to be “vibration” is larger than in the case of a loss. In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to “red” is larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of being out of place. That is, the possibility of a big hit is suggested by the mode of the push button 120 after the change.

  Focusing on the mode of the first operation promotion image, the ratio determined to be “red” is larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. The ratio determined as “red / large” is larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  When the mode of the push button 120 is determined to be “red” (specifically, “red” or “red / vibration”), the mode of the first operation promotion image is “white” (specifically, , “White / small” or “white / large”). That is, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first operation promotion image having a mode common to the plurality of modes of the push button 120. Also, when the mode of the push button 120 is determined to be “white” (specifically, “white” or “white / vibration”), the mode of the first operation promotion image is “ It may be determined to be “white” (specifically, “white / small” or “white / large”).

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the “common mode” is “white”, but may be “white / small” or “white / large”. That is, a part of the aspect of the first operation promotion image is the same. However, the “common aspect” may be exactly the same aspect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 101 determines the mode of the first operation promotion image and the mode of the push button 120 after the change in a lump, but may also determine them separately. Good. In that case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the mode of the first operation promotion image by lottery using random numbers, and determines the mode of the push button 120 after the change by lottery using other random numbers.

  Further, when the button effect and the operation unit effect are executed in combination, for example, when determining the effect mode of the button effect to be executed, the mode of the operation unit effect is determined together with the operation promotion notification mode of the button effect. You may make it do. Further, in this case, for example, when the process for displaying the operation promotion image (step S8111 or the like) is executed in the effect symbol changing process, the mode of the push button 120 is changed from the normal mode by the operation unit effect. Control to change the mode of the push button 120 may be performed when the process of deleting the operation promotion image (step S8115 or the like) is executed. Note that when the button effect is executed, the operation unit effect may be always executed, or for example, whether or not the operation unit effect is executed may be determined by lottery using a random number.

  As described above, when the operation unit effect is configured to be executable, the mode of the push button 120 is changed to one of a plurality of modes according to the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state, and according to the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state. Although the first operation promotion image is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the first operation promotion image in a mode common to the plurality of modes of the push button 120 is displayed. Also, according to the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state The display mode of the first operation promotion image is changed to one of a plurality of display modes, and the mode of the push button 120 is set to one of the plurality of modes according to the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state. Is set to a mode common to a plurality of display modes of the first operation promotion image (for example, “white” (specifically, “white” or “white / vibration”) shown in FIG. For production It is possible to further improve the interest of that game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect is achieved by combining “red / small” or “red / large” (with respect to the first operation promotion image) and “red” or “red / vibration” (with respect to the push button 120). Never executed. If the aspect of the first operation promotion image (in this case, red) and the aspect of the push button 120 (in this case, red) are the same, the player may expect something, By preventing the operation promotion notification and the operation unit effect from being executed in the same manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player expects something but does not cause an event corresponding to the expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, coloring and vibration are used as the type of the push button 120. However, the push button 120 rotates, the push button 120 protrudes (bounces up), the temperature of the push button 120 changes, and the push button 120. Curing or the like may be used. Moreover, although white and red were used as color development of the push button 120, those colors are an example.

  In addition, the operation unit effect can be executed at any timing during, for example, a variable display or a big hit game, and during the variable display, it is executed in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation to develop into a big hit or super reach. During the big hit game, the game may be executed in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation to be transferred to an advantageous game state (short time state or probability change state) after the increase in the number of rounds or the big hit game.

  The operation unit effect is not limited to changing the mode of the push button 120 from the normal mode when the operation promotion notification is performed (that is, before the operation of the push button 120 is detected). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected after the promotion notification is performed, the mode of the push button 120 may be changed from the normal mode. For example, when the button effect and the operation unit effect are executed in combination, the button effect image is displayed and the push button is displayed when the operation of the push button 120 is detected after the operation promotion notification is performed. The 120 modes may be changed from the normal mode.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection means (in this example, the push button 120) capable of detecting the player's action and the promotion notification (in this example) for prompting the action of the player. , A promotion notification means capable of executing a first operation promotion image and an operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image, and a predetermined effect (in this example) based on the detection of the player's action by the detection means. , Each button effect) is provided. Then, the promotion notification means at least the first promotion notification for promoting one operation (in this example, any one of the operation of pressing the push button 120 once, the operation of repeatedly hitting, and the operation of long pressing). A first pattern for displaying an image (in this example, a first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120), and a second promotion image (in this example, a first character indicating a predetermined character) in addition to the first promotion image 2 operation promotion images) can be executed with the second pattern (see FIGS. 32 to 34). In addition, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first pattern or the second pattern is used for the promotion notification (in this example, the first effect of the hit effect button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed using the first pattern) The degree of expectation is different between the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern (see FIG. 32C). Therefore, the expectation can be shown in an easily understandable manner to the player.

  Specifically, even if the degree of expectation varies depending on the mode of the promotion notification unit, the expectation level may be difficult to understand. However, as in this embodiment, the number of images displayed by the promotion notification unit If the degree of expectation is different depending on the difference (first pattern and second pattern), the player can intuitively recognize the degree of expectation.

  In this embodiment, the player's action is detected based on whether or not the operation of the push button 120 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected. Thus, the player's action may be detected. In addition, it is not limited to detecting a player's action depending on whether the push button 120, the stick controller 122, or the like has been operated a predetermined number of times. For example, predetermined information (for example, using the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) The player's action may be detected depending on whether or not an operation for inputting a specific command or the like has been performed. Further, in place of or in addition to the push button 120 and the stick controller 122, when a player's movement is detected, a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor for inputting a detection signal is provided, and these sensors are used. Thus, the player's motion may be detected. In addition, in this case, the operation promotion notification mode illustrated in FIG. 34 is not limited, and for example, an image imitating the appearance of the stick controller 122 and an image indicating “shrink” are displayed, or a hand is held over the sensor. The operation promotion notification may be performed by displaying an image simulating the state and an image indicating the character “Hold Your Hand”.

  Further, the fact that the promotion notification for urging one operation can be executed by the first pattern and the second pattern means that, for example, the operation promotion notification for urging the user to press the push button 120 once is given. It is possible to execute with one pattern and the second pattern, and the operation promotion notification for prompting an operation (for example, one operation) of pressing the push button 120 once can be executed with the first pattern. This does not mean that the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of repeatedly hitting 120 (for example, an operation different from the one operation) can be executed by the second pattern.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification by the second pattern has a higher degree of expectation than the promotion notification by the first pattern (in this example, the first effect of the button effect at the time of success / failure in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern) The second effect mode and the third effect mode have a higher expectation than the first effect mode of the hit effect button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern (see FIG. 32C). By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification by the second pattern can be executed in any of a plurality of modes (in this example, the first operation promotion image (large ) And the second operation promotion image (press) are displayed in the second pattern, and in the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of success / failure, the first operation promotion image (large) and the second operation promotion image ( The operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern for displaying the “stroke” (see FIG. 32C). Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced by various productions.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification means displays the first promotion image in a plurality of modes (in this example, the first operation promotion image (small), the first operation promotion image (middle), the first operation promotion image ( Or the like), and the degree of expectation varies depending on which of the plurality of first promotion images is displayed (in this example, the first operation promotion image (medium)). The first effect mode of the hit effect button effect in which the operation promotion notification to be displayed is performed, the second effect mode of the hit effect button effect in which the operation promotion notification to display the first operation promotion image (large) is performed, and the third effect mode The degree of expectation is different from the production mode (see FIG. 32C). Therefore, various effects can be executed, and the expectation effect shown for each effect can be different, so that the effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the promotion notification means displays the second promotion image in any of a plurality of modes (in this example, the second operation promotion image (press) or the second operation promotion image (stroke)). This is possible, and the degree of expectation varies depending on which second promotion image of a plurality of modes is displayed (in this example, whether or not operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (press) is performed) The degree of expectation is different between the second effect mode of the button effect at the time of turning and the third effect mode of the button effect at the time of hitting at which the operation promotion notification for displaying the second operation promotion image (stroke) is performed. )reference). Therefore, various effects can be executed, and the expectation effect shown for each effect can be different, so that the effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the display of the first promotion image in any of a plurality of modes means that the first operation promotion image (small), the first operation promotion image (medium), or the first operation promotion image (large). ) Is displayed, and the second operation promoting image (pressing), the second operation promoting image (hitting), and the second operation promoting are displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Although it demonstrated using the example which displays an image (continuous hit) and a 2nd operation promotion image (long press), the example of a some aspect is not restricted to this. For example, for the first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120, in addition to the size, the color and state (for example, the state where the push button 120 protrudes and the state where it does not protrude) Different embodiments can be used. Moreover, about the 2nd operation promotion image which shows a predetermined character, it can be set as a different aspect by changing a size and a color other than a character.

  For example, even if the first operation promotion image imitating the appearance of the push button 120 having the same size is used, it can be said that the first operation promotion image is displayed in a different manner when the process until the display is different. Specifically, when a small button image is displayed instantaneously, the small button image is divided when it is displayed in a state where the density gradually becomes darker and more easily visible from a state where the shading is too thin and visible. When a small button image is gradually combined and displayed as a whole, when a predetermined sound is output together with the display of the small button image, when a control is performed so that a predetermined light emitter is turned on along with the display of the small button image It can be said that the small button images are displayed in different modes. In other words, “displaying the first promotion image (second promotion image) in any of a plurality of modes” is not limited to the mode that is different depending on the image that is finally displayed, but is different in the process of display. It is a concept including what differs in aspect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect at a plurality of timings (in this example, when the effect symbol changes rapidly, when reach is reached, when a hit is made, etc.) (see FIG. 31). ), The promotion notification means executes the promotion notification by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different rate according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed (in this example, the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed). At the timing when the button effect is executed and the timing when the reach is established, the operation promotion notification is executed in the first pattern at a rate of 100%, and at the timing when the button effect is executed at the time of success or failure, the display result is not In the case of the case, the operation promotion notification is executed by the first pattern (the second pattern at the rate of 30%) at a rate of 70%, and the display result is a big hit (At a rate of 65% the second pattern) the first pattern in a proportion of 35% to perform operations promoting notification by reference. Figure 32). Therefore, attention can be paid to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, it is configured that the operation promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the hit / fail button effect is executed. At the timing when the button effect or the reach button is executed, the operation promotion notification is executed by the first pattern, and at the timing when the hit effect is executed, the operation promotion notification is executed by the second pattern. You may make it do. Further, for example, the operation promotion notification may be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at the timing when the button effect at the time of high speed fluctuation or the button effect at the time of reach is executed. In this case, for example, at the timing when the button effect at the time of high-speed fluctuation is executed, when the operation promotion notification is executed by the second pattern, it is determined that at least the reach state is reached and the button effect is executed when the reach is established In this case, when the operation promotion notification is executed by the second pattern, it may be determined that at least the super reach effect is developed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that a promotion alert | report may be performed by either a 1st pattern and a 2nd pattern in a different ratio according to the timing at which a predetermined | prescribed effect is performed, it replaces with this. Or in addition, for example, according to the gaming state (short time state or probability variation state) or the difference in the production mode, the promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different rate. Good

  In this embodiment, the detection means includes operation means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) that can be operated by the player, and the effect execution means is predetermined according to the operation on the operation means. An effective period informing means (in this example, each button effect) can be executed and an effective period in which the operation is effective is notified (in this example, a remaining effective period image is displayed), and an effective period has ended. And an end notification means for displaying the end of the effective period (in this example, displaying an end image of the effective period), and the end notification means was operated until the end of the effective period Sometimes an end notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the effective period has ended based on the operation.

  In this embodiment, the detection means includes operation means that can be operated by the player (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.), and the effect execution means is an operation effect using the operation means ( In this example, when the operation effect executing means for executing the operation unit effect (for example, in the effect symbol changing process, the process of displaying the operation promotion image (step S8111 etc.) is executed, the operation effect is pushed. The button 120 is controlled to change the mode of the button 120 from the normal mode), and the promotion notification means is a promotion image (in this example, a predetermined color, a predetermined size) for prompting the operation when the operation effect is executed. Display control means for displaying the first operation promotion image (see FIG. 45) on the display means (in this example, the effect display device 9), and the operation effect executing means operates according to the degree of expectation. The stage is changed to one of a plurality of modes (in this example, “white”, “red”, “white / vibration”, “red / vibration” shown in FIG. 45), and the display control means responds to the expectation. The promotion image is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes (in this example, “white / small”, “red / small”, “white / large”, “red / large” shown in FIG. 45). It is configured to have a common image display control means for displaying a promotion image of an aspect common to a plurality of aspects (in this example, “white” (“white / small” and “white / large”) shown in FIG. 45). It may be. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by the effect using the operation means.

  Note that in this embodiment, the first promotion notification is made to promote one action (in this example, any one of the operation of pressing the push button 120 once, the operation of repeatedly hitting, and the operation of long pressing). A first pattern for displaying an image (in this example, a first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120), and a second promotion image (in this example, a first character indicating a predetermined character) in addition to the first promotion image (2 operation promotion image) can be executed with the second pattern, but instead of or in addition to this, the operation display image 9 is displayed on the effect display device 9 and a light emitting body such as a predetermined LED or lamp. Can be executed by a pattern that lights or blinks, an operation promotion image displayed on the effect display device 9, and a pattern that outputs a predetermined sound, or a combination of these. Good. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on which pattern is used for promoting notification.

  Note that the timing of executing a predetermined effect (in this example, each button effect) based on the detection of the player's action by the detecting means is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, Arbitrary timings such as during production, pre-reading notice production, and big hit production may be used. Also in this case, the promotion notification may be executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern at a different rate according to the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed during a pseudo-continuous effect, a different ratio is obtained before and after the temporary stop of the effect symbol in the pseudo-continuous effect (or depending on how many times the pseudo-ream is). You may comprise so that a promotion alert | report may be performed by either a 1st pattern and a 2nd pattern.

  Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect (in this example, each button effect) suggests that a big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display during the variable display with different expectations. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called look-ahead notice may be used to indicate that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display based on any one of the reserved memories with different expectations. . For example, based on the fact that an operation has been detected during the detection valid period, the pending display may be changed to one of a plurality of display modes, thereby suggesting that a big hit will be made with different expectations. Good.

  In this embodiment, the effect mode of each button effect is determined in the effect symbol variation start process, but may be determined in the effect symbol variation process. For example, in the effect symbol variation start process, whether or not to execute each button effect, determine the detection effective period when executing, and when an operation is detected during the detection effective period in the effect symbol variation process, You may comprise so that the aspect of a button effect image may be determined and displayed.

  Note that the structure described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a game system called a so-called portable interlocking system. A gaming system called a mobile-linked system generally has a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined privilege for a player based on the predetermined information output by the gaming machine. A privilege granting device for performing the granting process.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine has a predetermined condition such as the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the so-called consecutive resort number (the number of jackpots during the probability variation state), the number of mission achievements, etc. It is stored as a history, and a two-dimensional code or the like is displayed as predetermined information at the end of the game. Further, the player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph the two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a Web server (privilege granting device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history. For example, as a predetermined privilege, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's mobile terminal, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's mobile terminal and the player next time When playing a game, the display screen of the gaming machine is processed so as to be customized according to the player's preference.

  When the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment is applied to the gaming system as described above, for example, the establishment of a predetermined condition is that the hit effect button effect in the third effect mode is executed and a big hit is achieved. The number of times may be managed as a game history by the Web server. Then, according to the number of times that the button effect at the time of the third effect mode is executed, the digital content can be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine can be customized. .

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, when the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, an operation promotion image is displayed at an arbitrary timing such as during rotation of a symbol, and a stop button (or an operation button provided separately from the stop button) ) Is performed based on the operation of the player, the winning combination (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) or the presence of freeze production, RT (replay time) lottery result, AT (assist time) lottery As a result, an ART (assist replay time) lottery result may be suggested. Also in this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the number of operation promotion images to be displayed (for example, only the first operation promotion image or the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image). Depending on the degree, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine that is controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game is based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not it is a big hit and determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a prize (pre-reading judgment), and shows a result of the prize judgment result (Design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. Further, for example, the winning control determination (prefetching determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and is a main board (for example, the main board 11, A predetermined area (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second start winning port, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a big winning port, Normal winning ball device 906A serving as a start winning opening, general winning ports 9050A to 9050D serving as general winning areas, and predetermined winning ball information (for example, a combination of bonuses) paid out by passing the game medium to the predetermined area Information display means (for example, display monitor 9029) and detection means (for example, push button 120 or stick control) that can detect the player's action. A roller 122, an infrared sensor, etc.) and a promotion notification means (for example, an operation promotion notification for displaying a first operation promotion image or a second operation promotion image) for urging the player's action (for example, an operation notification) Based on the fact that the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes steps S8111, S8125, S8139, S8153, and S8167) and the action of the player is detected by the detecting means (for example, each button effect) Production execution means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8114, S8128, S8142, S8156, and S8170), and the promotion notification means has one operation (for example, push Operation to press button 120 once, operation to repeatedly hit, and operation to press and hold In addition to the first promotion image, the first pattern for displaying at least a first promotion image (for example, a first operation promotion image simulating the appearance of the push button 120), and the first promotion image. The first pattern can be executed by a second pattern that displays a second promotion image (for example, a second operation promotion image showing a predetermined character) different from the first promotion image (see FIGS. 32 to 34). And the second pattern, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the promotion notification is executed (for example, the button effect at the time of success / failure in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the first pattern) The degree of expectation differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode and the third effect mode of the hit effect button effect in which the operation promotion notification is performed by the second pattern (see FIG. 32C). A gaming machine is characterized in that the information display means is provided on the main board so that visibility to the predetermined prize ball information is not hindered.

  According to the above gaming machine, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state can be easily shown to the player. In addition, it is possible to easily recognize what adjustment has been made to the game nail or the like. Further, in the above gaming machine, the information display means provided on the main board is subjected to the jackpot number, the number of times the promotion notification for promoting the player's operation is performed, the promotion notification, and the player actually operates. The number of times that the game has been performed and the number of times that the player has actually performed after the promotion notification has been performed may be displayed.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can easily recognize what adjustment has been made to a game nail or the like, a predetermined area (in which a prize ball is paid out when a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes) ( For example, an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B serving as a second start winning opening, a special variable winning ball device 907 serving as a large winning opening, an ordinary winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 9050A serving as a general winning area. ˜9050D) and predetermined information (for example, combination, combination ratio) provided on the main board (for example, main board 9011) for controlling the game and paid out by passing the game medium to the predetermined area. Possible information display means (for example, display monitor 9029), and the information display means is provided on the main board for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. The gaming machine it is, and the like. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
As described above, the entry of the game media into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared to the entry of the game medium into the start winning area where a special symbol variable display is executed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that entry of the game media into the general winning area becomes substantially difficult.

  However, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Therefore, originally, it is desirable that the game nail is in a maintenance state of the game nail so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). In this case, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of the game medium entering the general winning area.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. In a gaming machine according to an embodiment to be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of gaming in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 46 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 903a formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming machine frame 903 so as to be openable and closable.

  The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 9010, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. The game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 902. The left game area 9010A on the left side and the right game area 9010B on the right side with respect to the center of the game area 9010.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 46, on the right side of the game area 9010). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and each is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. It is not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . There may be one special symbol display device.

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R start changing the decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

  In the image display device 905, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three areas may be provided to be bonded or separated, or to be able to be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by an effect control CPU 90120 mounted on an effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 904A is executing variable display of the first special figure, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute the effect display and perform the second special symbol display. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 904B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 905 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols 905L, 905C, and 905R. There are numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Can be, for example, a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs that consist of the characters “Accuracy”) and blank symbols (which are also known as “2R probable big hits”) and blank symbols ( A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, for example, from the smallest symbol number to the largest symbol number, from top to bottom sequentially. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 905, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a normal symbol described later. In this embodiment, the 4th symbol variable display for the first special figure is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived. The 4th symbol display area 905A and the 4th symbol variable display for the 2nd special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the 2nd special symbol variable display, and the display result of the variable display is derived. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

  In this embodiment, the decorative symbol variable display is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variable display. (However, to be precise, the decorative symbol variable display is performed on the effect control CPU 90120 side by specifying the variation pattern. This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 905, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects, for example, and effects such that the moving object shields all or part of the screen are performed. For this reason, even when viewing the display screen on the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variable display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the current state of variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "fourth symbol", and the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol The 4th symbol display area 905B for 2 special symbols may be collectively referred to as a “4th symbol display area”.

  In the variable display (variable display) of the 4th symbol, the 4th symbol display areas 905A and 905B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the 4th symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is white, the second symbol for the second special symbol is displayed). 4 symbol display area 905 </ b> B is black), and is realized by continuing the blinking state of repeatedly turning on (displaying) and turning off (not displaying) at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 904A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 904B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth special symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

  When the big special symbol display device 904B stops and displays the big hit symbol, the fourth special symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is established based on the game ball having entered the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transmission color) (for example, the leftmost display part in the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, the special symbol game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is established. One of the display parts which are the modes is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  That is, when a start winning is generated, in the start winning storage display area 905H, holding information (an object indicated by a round shape in FIGS. 46, 76, etc.) corresponding to a special game executed based on the start winning is provided. Display control to be newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). When a new start prize is generated when n pieces of hold information are displayed (when n special figure games are put on hold), the (n + 1) th hold information from the left corresponding to the new start prize Will be newly displayed. When the start condition for the special figure game being held is satisfied, the leftmost holding information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) holding information from the left is left one by one. Shifted to the (n-1) th display.

  The order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated, but the start condition for the special figure game for the second special figure is greater than the start condition for the special figure game for the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). It may be.

  In the start winning memory display area 905H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 46, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first hold stored number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second hold stored number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning ball formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including. A movable accessory 1000 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905.

  The movable accessory 901000 includes a motor and a lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a later-described change result notification effect or a pre-reading notification effect is executed.

  Below the image display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start winning port. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first starter switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door closes the big prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the great prize opening. A game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be referred to as “total reserved memory number” or “special figure reserved memory number”.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 46, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. Note that the normal symbol display 9020 is not limited to a variable display of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, etc. as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 9041A and 9041B.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

  The general winning ports 9050A to 9050D are configured by ball receiving members that project forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (horizontal width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are arranged in the horizontal direction so as not to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the interval between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D is an interval through which at least one game ball can pass. Also, a winning ball device for switching the opening / closing of the openings of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normally variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening / closing of the second start winning port) is not provided. It is always open. Further, even if a game ball wins the general winning opening 9050A to 9050D, neither the special-game variable display start condition nor the normal-game variable display start condition is established based on the win.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won the general prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Along with the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball apparatus, for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening, or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the large winning opening. It is good also as the specific value provided when a game ball wins a general winning opening to make it easy for a game ball to win a 2nd start winning opening and a big winning opening by operating the winning ball apparatus 907.

  Further, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C. 10 prize balls are awarded when a game ball is awarded to the first general prize opening 9050A or the fourth general prize opening 9050D (that is, a specific value of a different size is provided). May be provided). The specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening When a game ball is won in 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B or the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, a specific value of a different type is given).

  Also, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening And a case where the variable winning ball apparatus operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the specific value type is different), so that different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, when 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening, and when 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. Different effects may be executed (that is, when specific values have different magnitudes).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the first general prize corresponding to each of the first general prize opening 9050A, the second general prize opening 9050B, the third general prize opening 9050C, and the fourth general prize opening 9050D is as follows. It is detected by the mouth switch 9024A, the second general prize port switch 9024B, the third general prize port switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize port switch 9024D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize port switch 9024A, the second general prize port switch 9024B, the third general prize port switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize port switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Will be paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the winning opening switches corresponding to the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are provided, the game control microcomputer 90100 receives a game ball at the general winning opening. In addition to the above, it is also possible to detect which general winning award the game ball has won.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the structure provided with a different general winning opening switch for every general winning opening, You may make it provide a common general winning opening switch with respect to several general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. A common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in the general prize opening provided in the right game area 9010B) is provided for the third general prize opening 9050C and the fourth general prize opening 9050D. It may be. In addition, a common general prize opening switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in any of the general prize winning openings) is provided for all the general prize winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You may be made to do.

  In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting box (not shown) It is to be collected on the amusement island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out-ball detector, game balls 9010 (game balls led to the out-ports without winning any of the winning ports, and winning balls set in any of the winning ports) Game balls collected in a cage) All game balls are detected. Each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 counts the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. When the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). An out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 9012 so that the number of outs can be tabulated in a certain number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 90120 side.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, there is an upper plate 9060 that holds (stores) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. Is provided. For example, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 9060.

  A key hole 9061 is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. The store clerk in the amusement hall inserts the key into the key hole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown), and uses the hinge mechanism to attach the glass door frame 903a to the gaming machine frame 903. It can be opened and closed. By maintaining the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, maintenance of the gaming board (gauge board including gaming nails and winning holes) 902 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging), A mode changeover switch 9031 and a display changeover switch 9032 which will be described later can be operated.

  A lower tray 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 9060 is provided immediately below the upper tray 9060. A game ball as a game medium is directed to the gaming area at the lower right of the upper tray 9060. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 9063 operated by a player or the like for launching is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle 9063 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. Note that the operation button 9030 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A player's operation action performed on the operation button 9030 includes a press detection switch (not shown) that detects pressing of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder that detects the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. (Not shown).

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the game balls that have passed through the first passing gate 9041A provided in the left gaming area 9010A and the second passing gate 9041B provided in the right gaming area 9010B are transferred to the first passing gate 9041A shown in FIG. The normal symbol start condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020, such as detection by the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second passing gate 9041B, After being established, the normal symbol game 9090 is started by the normal symbol display device 9020 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable symbol normal display is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. The

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of “normal symbol lose” is displayed. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first start port switch 9022A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 904B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second start port switch 9022B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result after a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result. " The specific special symbol (big jackpot symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the probability variation big hit and the non-probable variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit game state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 907 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number of times. A round game is executed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening in a period until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. The In this way, the open / close plate that opens the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the special prize opening, thereby providing a special variable winning ball apparatus. 907 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is ended. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round games may be provided.

  After the big hit state is over, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time shortening control is executed in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state The time-short state is controlled, and the probability variation state in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with the time reduction control is controlled.

  Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state different from a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a short-time state, or a probability variation state. Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, the variable display result in each special figure game and decorative symbol variable display will be “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

  The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is also referred to as “probability variation jackpot”. The big hit (type) that is controlled to the short-time state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is ended is also referred to as “non-probability variation big hit”.

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game to have a shorter variation time (ordinary symbol variation time) than in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the certain change state or the short time state. A state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, variable display of the decorative symbols is started. A period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variation symbol”). Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, etc.) The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbols are changing, or the decorative symbols are a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern are referred to as “reach effect display” (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the super reach reach mode appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is higher than when the normal reach reach mode appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 9011 side. Or not is determined.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach lose combination”) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. At a later time, for example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 is “1”. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything is acceptable.

  In addition, after a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a pre-read that notifies and notifies that pending data with a special figure display result of “hit” is stored during the round in the jackpot game state. A notice effect may be executed.

  As described above, the game area 9010 includes the left game area 9010A and the right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 9010A. It is possible to switch between left-handed shots for launching game balls toward the right and right-hand hits for launching game balls toward the right game region 9010B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A (when a game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game balls win the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game balls are fired at 9010B. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol has a longer variation time (ordinary diagram variation time) than when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the normal symbol variable display result is “per regular diagram”. Therefore, the rate at which game balls launched into the left game area 9010A in the normal state win the second start winning opening is extremely low compared to the rate at which the first starting winning opening is won. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is fired into the right game area 9010B (when a game ball enters the right game area 9010B), the left side of the pachinko game machine 901 is arranged by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where game balls are fired in the game area 9010A, the percentage of game balls winning at the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game balls are not won at the first starting winning opening. Yes. Therefore, even if the player hits the right hand in the normal state, the percentage of the game ball winning in the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) left-handed in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the rate at which game balls sometimes win the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will make a left strike in the normal state.

  In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched into the right game area 9010B passing through the second passage gate 9041B is the same as that of the game balls launched into the left game area 9010A due to the placement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 9041A. The rate at which the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B wins the open second start winning opening is determined by the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown) or the like that is launched into the left game area 9010A. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second start winning opening in the open state.

  In the probability variation state and the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per regular diagram” is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the player makes a right turn in the probability changing state and the short time state is left in the probability changing state and the short time state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins at the start winning opening (either the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player makes a right turn in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched into the right game area 9010B to the open big prize opening is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guide members (not shown), and the like. It is higher than the percentage of winning in the open big opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player makes a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues to the right in the probability change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and enters the normal state. With the transition (for example, the probability change state without the big hit game state or the end of the short-time state), it will return to the left-handed.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched in the left game area 9010A to the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening 9050B provided in the left game area 9010A is the first general prize opening 9050A and the second general prize opening 9050A. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the percentage to win 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game balls launched in the right game area 9010B to the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D provided in the right game area 9010B is the third general prize opening 9050C and the fourth general prize opening 9050C. Depending on the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the percentage to win 9050D.

  It should be noted that only part of or all of the plurality of general winning awards provided in the left gaming area 9010A (the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B) are the game balls launched into the left gaming area 9010A. A game ball that can be won and the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B may not win, and a plurality of general prize holes provided in the right game area 9010B (the third general prize opening 9050C and the fourth general prize opening). For some or all of 9050D), only the game balls launched into the right game area 9010B can win, and the game balls launched into the left game area 9010C may not win.

  Thus, since the left-handed is performed in the normal state, the probability that a game ball will win the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B among the four general winning ports is high, and the jackpot gaming state, In the probability variation state and the short-time state, right-handed is performed, and therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D among the four general winning ports. In accordance with the game state and the like, as the game area where the game ball is launched changes, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability variation state and the short time state. In the area 9010B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the winning frequency at the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and an audio lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board includes a ball payout device (not shown) in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011). The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a function to control. The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

  Further, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. Although described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 9012 provides effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 909 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The sound lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012, lighting / A lamp driver circuit that turns off the light is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the main board 9011 includes a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general prize port switch 9024A. , Wirings for transmitting detection signals from the second general prize port switch 9024B, the third general prize port switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize port switch 9024D are connected.

  The first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are, for example, What has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a so-called “sensor”, may be used. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first hold display device 9025A, a second hold display device 9025B, and a general drawing hold display device 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. In addition, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, for example, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 side to the main board 9011 side.

  The relay board 9015 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit has a diode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011 and a cathode connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012 and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can block the input of a signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the production control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector on the main board 9011. By providing, illegal signal input from the outside to the main board 9011 can be prevented.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 905, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, or short-time state), a variation start command for designating a variation start in a special game, and a special game in a special game. A variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design variation time or a design pattern on the image display device 905, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a design design, and a design design for the image display device 905 A decorative ball stop command for specifying variable display stop, a jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start or end of a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end specifying command, or a game ball has won a first start winning port or a second starting winning port Start winning command that is sometimes output, and is output when a game ball wins a general winning opening般入 Award ports specified command, the game ball in the special winning opening includes a special winning opening winning command or the like to be output when the prize.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103 It comprises a random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform the game control, so that the game control microcomputer 90100 (or the CPU 90103) executes the following ( Specifically, the term “perform processing” means that the CPU 90103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 9011.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 90120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and the CPU 90120 for effect control A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the production control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121, the production control CPU 90120 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122, and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the production control CPU 90120 enters the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the presentation control CPU 90120 is an I / O. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 through O90125 is also performed.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the sound lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 9030 has been detected is sent from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and operation in the display changeover switch 9032 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the part (first position or second position) is also connected.

  The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has a light emitting body such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED, operation buttons 9030, a movable accessory 901000, and an effect accessory. A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (effect electric component) including the movable member included in the.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 47 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120. For example, the display control unit 90123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Control. The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode switch 9031. Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal to be enabled and a signal for enabling the state of the display changeover switch 9032 to be confirmed, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. Composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 9013, and a sound lamp control board 9014 are transmitted. A command (drive signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 901000 is output.

  On the voice control board 9013, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 908L and 908R an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the audio lamp control board 9014. As an example, in the audio lamp control board 9014, the electrical signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electrical decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 and the like.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the abnormality that has occurred is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013, or the voice lamp control board 9014. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 909, the decoration LED, etc. is controlled via light to notify by light, or an abnormality notification image (error message) is displayed on the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123. To display. Abnormalities include magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, radio wave abnormalities, and the like, which are detected using an abnormality detection sensor group 9026 and the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 only needs to be configured to detect an abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 9026 are prepared according to the type of abnormality. What is specifically included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be determined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like. An abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely unlikely to occur in a normal game performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, And a phenomenon that may hinder the progress of the game, and particularly a phenomenon that requires notification to the player or the employee of the game hall (pachinko store, etc.).

  The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 includes, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality or the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. 9011 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 and an error has occurred due to the display of an error message on the image display device 905, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in the game effect lamp 909, etc. Notification is performed. For example, if an abnormality has occurred, an image of the characters “An error has occurred” is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905, as shown in FIG.

  Here, not only the abnormality has occurred by the notification means such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909, but any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality and front door opening. You may make it alert | report so that it is identifiable whether abnormality of this was detected.

  The notification of magnetic abnormality is notification of abnormality performed when a magnetic abnormality (abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. There are fraudulent acts in which a game medium is moved by a magnet to win a prize opening, or a predetermined area is clogged with a game medium to guide the game medium to the prize opening. By notifying the magnetic abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force → there is a magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the magnetic display is notified on the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the characters “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed.

  The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus 907. There is a fraudulent act that intentionally shakes the pachinko machine to change the flow direction of the game medium closer to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (stronger than the predetermined threshold). Shows vibration of vibration → vibration is abnormal). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 905 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the characters “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

  The radio wave abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a radio wave abnormality (abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case there is a possibility of fraud) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switches (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023, etc., these switches are turned on / off, etc. There is a cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether a signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of a predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display apparatus 905 and the like are notified of the radio wave abnormality. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 905, an image of the characters “A radio wave error has occurred” is displayed.

  Each of the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032 is configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and is provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode change switch 9031 and the display change switch 9032 configured by DIP switches are configured by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of the knob is set to one end side and the other end). By switching to the side), the processing (control program) executed by the CPU 90120 for effect control can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, the glass door frame 903a covers the front surface of the game board 902, so that the player cannot operate the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032. It has become. It should be noted that the mode change switch 9031 and the display change switch 9032 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 903a when the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 46). Since it is installed at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, it is not shown in FIG.

  As described above, the store clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the key hole 9061 to open the locking device (not shown) and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, The operation of the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 (switching of the DIP switch) becomes possible. When the operation of the mode switch 9031 and the display switch 9032 is completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and a key is inserted into the key hole 9061 to lock the locking device (not shown). )) Is closed.

  When the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage at the mode changeover terminal of the CPU 90120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in a high state. When the voltage at the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation portion of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the first position, that is, information for the player (for example, a demonstration) The game mode for displaying a screen or the like is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is not displayed on the image display device 905. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 has information for the store clerk (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is to display the number of winning a prizes, etc., and the information of the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the CPU 90120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is in a high state. When the voltage at the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 indicates the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 905. On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 receives a prize for the general prize opening. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on the display control table to be described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) is allowed to be displayed on the image display device 905. To do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selector switch 9031 and the display selector switch 9032 are provided on the front side of the game board 902 (the surface facing the player), but the mode selector switch 9031 and / or the display selector switch 9032 are provided. The game board 902 may be provided on the back side (game island side). In the case of such a configuration, by using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903, the gaming board 902 is rotated forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, so that the gaming board 902 is moved to the back side. The provided mode changeover switch 9031 and / or display changeover switch 9032 can be operated.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 includes the start winning command as described above. The start prize command includes a start prize designation command that indicates whether a start prize has occurred for the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, or a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. There are a start winning determination result designation command and the like indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

  The CPU 90103 has an effective start winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit determining random number and the big hit type determining random number are stored in the first random number storage area for the first special figure. A command for designating the “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning a prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  Note that the CPU 90103 starts the game ball at the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the first start winning opening). When an invalid start prize that is not eligible for the special game is detected, the command specifying the “first start prize opening” is set as the start prize designation command, and the determination result at the start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command ("first start prize opening" designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  The CPU 90103 has an effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. A command for designating “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value in the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning a prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

  It should be noted that the CPU 90103 has a start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning opening reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the second starting winning opening) When an invalid start prize that is paid out, but is not subject to a special game, is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command, and a determination result at start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

  In this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and based on the determination result Although the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable pattern changing pattern corresponding to the starting winning is determined, A prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning is a super reach variation pattern, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning is a non-reach variation pattern. Good.

  Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern for the big hit determination Along with the random number and the jackpot type determination random number, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern as the big hit determining random number and the big hit. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the second special figure random number storage area.

  Here, the ROM 90101 corresponds to the deviation variation pattern determination table in which a random number range corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 53A is set, and to the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 53B. The big hit variation pattern determination table in which the random number range is set is stored.

  When the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is “out of”, the CPU 90103 extracts (stores) by referring to the deviation variation pattern determination table. The variation pattern determination random number is included in the random number range of the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is identified, and the identified variation pattern is “non-reach” , A start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating which variation pattern is “normal reach deviation” or “super reach deviation” is set.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the start winning determination (the display result specified by the start winning determination result specifying command) is either “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit”, the CPU 90103 changes the big win Refer to the pattern determination table to determine which variation pattern random number for the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination is included in the random number range, and identify the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number Then, a start winning variation pattern determination result designation command for designating whether the identified variation pattern is a variation pattern of “normal reach big hit” or “super reach big hit” is set.

  When the CPU 90103 detects an invalid start winning, the CPU 90103 sets blank data that specifies that the start winning change pattern determination result designation command is not a valid start winning.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning command together with the aforementioned start winning opening designation command and start winning determination result designation command.

  The effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as “first starting prize opening” and a start winning determination result designation command including valid data that is not blank data (and a start including valid data that is not blank data). When receiving the winning variation pattern determination result designation command), the start winning determination result designation command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result designation command) is held in the first winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of memories (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start prize), the start prize opening designation command designated as “second start prize opening” and valid data that is not blank data Start prize determination result specification command (and start prize variation variable including valid data that is not blank data) The start winning time determination result specifying command (and the start winning time variation pattern determination result specifying command) is received by the second reserved memory number (in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure ( It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number after addition including the effective start winning. The effect control CPU 90120 confirms the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) stored in the start prize command storage area, so that the first special characteristic is established before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the winning prize specifying command specifying “first starting prize opening” and the starting winning determination result specifying command including blank data (and the starting winning variation pattern determining result specifying command including blank data). Is received, the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) is specified for the first special figure. It is not stored in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area to be described later can store the winning history for the first start winning opening. Start winning port designation command specified with “Start winning prize opening” and start winning judgment result specifying command including blank data (and starting input including blank data) When the time variation pattern determination result designation command) is received, it is determined that an invalid start prize has occurred in the second start prize opening, and the start prize determination result designation command (and the start prize variation pattern judgment result designation command) ) Is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (excluded from execution of the pre-reading notice effect), and the winning history storage area described later stores the winning history for the second starting winning opening. Is possible.

  As described above, as a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command. As shown below, when the main board 9011 starts variable display of the special symbol, the main board 9011 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special figure display result that is derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the fluctuation pattern. Output a change pattern specification command for The ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012 stores effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern in advance, and the effect control CPU 90120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command. Data is selected and effect control is executed according to the selected effect control data.

  The CPU 90103, when the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “out of” and together with the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  If the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the first storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the first special figure.

  The CPU 90103, when the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure, In addition, among the random numbers for variation pattern determination, the big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the first storage area (storage area corresponding to the number of stored storages = 1) and the variation pattern determination random number are read out and thereafter The big hit determination random number, the big hit type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, short-time state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

  If the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table at the start determination, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for designating “out of” and together with the jackpot determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area is determined to be included in the random number range of the variation pattern set in the deviation variation pattern determination table, and corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the “outlier fluctuation pattern” is determined.

  When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the read jackpot type determination random number is stored for each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure. It is determined which of the existing determination values matches. Then, a variable display result notification command for designating the “big hit” of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for variation pattern judgment read from the first storage area together with the big hit judgment random number is By determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and identifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number, the “big hit variation pattern” is determined.

  Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command for designating the determined variation pattern together with the variation start command for designating the variation start of the second special figure.

  When the CPU 90120 for effect control receives the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern specification command for specifying the change start of the first special figure, the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern specification command is selected. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determining result specifying command) stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 90121, so that the reach state is established at the reach state establishment timing corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls variable display of symbols. That is, the production control CPU 90120 can grasp the reach timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern designation command when receiving the variation start command designating the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern designation command. At the same time, a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the variable display result notification command is determined. Then, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Accordingly, of the start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) stored in the start winning command storing area for the second special figure, the leading storage area (the number of stored memories) = 1 in the storage area corresponding to = 1) (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specifying command) and the subsequent storage area start winning determination result specifying command (and the start winning prize) The time variation pattern determination result designation command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

  In addition, when the first general prize opening switch 9024A to the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D detect that the game balls have won the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the game balls are placed in any of the general prize openings. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. That is, when a game ball is detected by the first general prize opening switch 9024A, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general prize opening 9050A is output, and a game ball is outputted by the second general prize opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 9050B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general prize opening switch 9024C, a command to the third general prize opening 9050C is output. A general prize opening designation command for designating a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 9050D is output. .

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and which general winning opening the game ball has won based on the received general winning opening designation command. . In addition, as described above, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 designates which start winning opening the game ball has won. A mouth designation command is received. Thereby, the CPU 90120 for effect control stores the information that can identify the general winning opening where the winning has occurred and the information that can identify the starting winning opening where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 according to the order of winning. It is possible.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the general winning opening designated by the received general winning opening specifying command (the general winning opening where the game ball has won). Confirming whether the start winning port designated by the received start winning port designation command (the starting winning port where the game ball has won) is the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. The RAM 90122 stores the winning history of each general winning opening and each starting winning opening. For example, when the game balls win in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, The history of “winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, first general winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, third general winning mouth”] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

  In addition, when the winning at the start winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 receives a start winning opening specifying command and a start winning determination result specifying command. , It may be transmitted prior to the general prize opening designation command. For example, detection by a start port switch of any of the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, and any of the general winning port switches of the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. When the detection is confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt process), the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the start winning port designation command and the start winning time determination result designation command as the general winning port designation command. It is better to send it first with higher priority. By using such a transmission order, the effect control CPU 90120 grasps that it has already received the start prize opening designation command and the start prize determination result designation command when the general prize opening designation command is received. It is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning time determination result designation command received in advance as the specific effect executed based on the winning in the general winning opening.

  Note that, when a winning at the general winning award occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a plurality of general winning award specifying commands in accordance with a predetermined priority order. To do. For example, if the detection by the first general prize port switch 9024A and the detection by the second general prize port switch 9024B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, in the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 The general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening that is more difficult to win may be transmitted first with priority. In addition, when the number of prize balls given according to the general prize opening is different, a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to a general prize opening with a larger number of prize balls may be preferentially transmitted first. Good.

  When the count switch 9023 detects that a game ball has been won at the big prize opening, a big prize opening prize command for designating that a game ball has won at the big prize opening is sent from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. Is output. Accordingly, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening based on the received big winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above. Similarly to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the big winning opening in the winning history storage area.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state until receiving a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to separately count the number of times received and the number of times received for the general winning opening designation command. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish and total the number of times of winning a prize money and the number of times of winning a general prize mouth during the period in which the game state is controlled to the big hit game state. It is also possible to display in 905.

  In addition, when a game ball is being fired in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins at any of the start winning port, the general winning port, and the big winning port with a certain frequency. If the decorative symbols are not variably displayed and a game ball has not been won in any of the predetermined winning period (for example, 1 minute), the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening, There is a high possibility that the player is in a non-game state in which no game is played. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to make a game end determination that determines that the game has ended.

  FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each of the first general winning ports 9050A to 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of wins for each general winning slot for each gaming state based on the jackpot start designation command, jackpot end designation command, gaming state designation command, and general prize opening designation command. . The gaming state designation command is a timing at which the gaming state changes (in this case, the gaming state designation command designates the gaming state to be controlled, and is transmitted, for example, at the end of the big hit gaming state or at the end of the short time state. Or a timing at which the special symbol variable display is started (the game state designation command in this case designates the game state when the special figure game is executed).

  In this example, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total for all periods), of which 46 are in the normal state, 2 are in the big hit gaming state, and the number in the probable state. Is 1, and the number of winnings in the short-time state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. Further, the total number of winnings in the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 are winning in the left-handed period and 27 are winning in the right-handed period.

  In this way, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored together with the number of winnings in each general winning opening, and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901). Is transmitted to a gaming device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided and displayed on a display device included in the gaming device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device included in the information management device. Thus, at the game hall, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball at each general winning opening and to use it for maintenance of game nails. For example, if the number of game balls received in a general prize opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail near the general prize opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

  Information on the number of winnings in the winning number management table (the number of winnings in each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in each gaming state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the left-handed period and the right-handed period, and the general winning opening) Is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (in the maintenance mode) and in the case of the first position (in the game mode). Do not show. The game shop clerk switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position, displays the winning number information in the winning number management table, performs game nail maintenance with reference to this, and enters the general winning opening. Appropriate frequency of winning game balls Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

  In this embodiment, the number-of-wins information in the number-of-wins management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory for special-purpose games), and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories for ordinary game) Regardless, the image display device 905 is continuously displayed while the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is in the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the gaming state. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state. Even if the operation unit of the mode change switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the short time state, or the big hit game state. It may be.

  Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution state of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is set to the second position. Even if the special symbol variable display is not executed and the number of reserved memory of the special figure game is 0, the display can be performed only, and the operation portion of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. The period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, or the period during which the special figure game hold memory number is not 0 may not be displayed. The winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayed on the image display device 905 according to the execution state of the usual game. For example, the operation unit of the mode switch 9031 is set to the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed, the display can be performed only during the period in which the number of reserved games of the normal game is 0, and the operation part of the mode switch 9031 is in the second position. The period during which the normal symbol variable display is executed, or the period during which the number of reserved games stored in the regular game is not 0 may not be displayed.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the number-of-wins management table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. Also, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the game hall is closed. The winning information for each gaming machine is stored every business day in the gaming information management device. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is obtained when the winning history in the winning history storage area described above is deleted (reset) based on execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, the operation button in the state where the store clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905) 9030).

  For example, the store clerk at the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode change switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting)). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total number of winnings of general winning mouths) stored in the winning number management table may be reset to zero. Is possible.

  FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an example of winning number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In this display control table, the number of wins to each of the general winning awards of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of wins to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings in the general winning award is 11, among which, the number of winnings in the first general winning opening 9050A is 3, the number of winnings in the second general winning opening 9050B is 5, and the third general winning opening. The number of winnings in 9050C is 2, and the number of winnings in the fourth general winning opening 9050D is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the number-of-wins information in the display control table (specifically, the number of objects displayed in accordance with the total number of winnings) is displayed when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (display setting). And the display setting of the general winning number is performed by the operation button 9030, the image is displayed on the image display device 905. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, the winning in the display control table is performed. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-display setting). Does not display the winning information in the display control table.

  That is, when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. Yes. Only when the store clerk of the game hall performs the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed according to the player's display setting operation.

  In this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening is executed. As for the production, as shown in FIG. 49, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 is used, the general winning display display setting (execution of specific production) is performed. It can be executed when (setting) is performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of execution non-permission setting), whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) is performed by the operation button 9030 is determined. The specific effect is not executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting), the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-execution setting). In this case, the specific performance is not executed.

  In other words, when a store clerk at the game hall performs a setting for disabling execution of a specific effect using the display changeover switch 9032, execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the player's execution setting operation. Only when the store clerk at the game hall performs execution permission setting of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the player's execution setting operation.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the setting as to whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting as to whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Game hall side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not only in such a form, it may be possible to individually set whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether or not to enable a specific effect, and may be set by different operating means. May be.

  The number-of-wins information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)). Regardless of the setting on the screen, it is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command. In addition, the number-of-wins information stored in the display control table (the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning slot) is the identification of the winning history in the winning history storage area described above corresponding to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the performance (A or B), etc., it is not erased, and when the game end determination is made by the performance control CPU 90120, for example, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. If the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize opening designation command have not been received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), they are erased (reset to 0).

  When the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to zero. For example, the coin-type object (winning display) displayed on the right side of the character “General Winning” on the screen of FIG. 51 described later is not displayed, and the number of display objects becomes zero. It should be noted that when the number of winnings in the general winning award is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings in each of the general winning awards stored in the display control table are determined as the game end. Next, when the number of winnings to the general winning award is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) is displayed.

  In addition, the store clerk or player of the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), regardless of the above game end determination, the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the number of winnings of each general winning mouth and the total winnings of general winning mouths) (Number) can be reset to 0, and accordingly, the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all displayed objects are erased).

  As shown in FIG. 50, the player's display setting operation is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 during the display of the demonstration screen not related to the progress of the special game and the progress of the normal game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and the start prize opening designation command, the general prize opening designation command, and the big prize opening prize command are set for a predetermined period (for example, 1 50 minutes), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen shown in FIG. 50 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is displayed.

  In the screen of FIG. 50 (1), a message “Please press the OK button to set the general winnings display setting” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed below the operation button 9030. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 in accordance with the instruction, the selection screen shown in FIG. 50 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon including the characters “display” and an icon including the characters “do not display” are displayed, and a message “decision button after selecting with the jog dial” is displayed, and an operation button 9030 ( An arrow that prompts the user to press the jog dial after being rotated is displayed.

  In order to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is turned to the left to select an icon including the characters “display”, and to enter the general winning award. In order not to display the number of winnings, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the right to select an icon including the characters “not displayed”. In this example, an icon including the characters “display” is selected.

  When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected in FIG. 50 (2), as shown in FIG. 50 (3), “the number of general winnings is displayed”. A message is displayed, and the display returns to the normal demonstration screen shown in FIG. By this setting operation, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at the time when the setting operation is completed (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 51) is displayed immediately. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may make it do.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected in FIG. 50 (2), a message “The number of general winnings is not displayed” is displayed, and FIG. 50 (4). Return to the normal demo screen. As a result of this setting operation, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

  Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, at the game hall side, the winning information stored in the display control table is stored in the image display device 905. Only when the display is permitted, a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) is displayed on the image display device 905. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning information stored in the display control table, As shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Is done.

  In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation section of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, on the game site side, when the player does not want to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 may be set to the first position (non-display position).

  In addition, in the case where the intention of the game hall has priority over the intention of the player, even though the operation section of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side ( Regardless of the setting on the player side, it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening), but on the player side as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her setting operation.

  In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (regardless of the setting on the player side) When it is already determined not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself that “the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed according to the setting operation on the player side” is not performed.

  Display setting on the game hall side (the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and display setting on the player side (the icon including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2)) When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. 51 (1), the screen is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 905. “General winning” is displayed. When a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. 51 (2), a coin-type object is placed on the right side of the character “general winning”. (Winning display) is displayed.

  The number of coin-type objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 51 (3), each time a game ball wins a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is incremented by one. As a result, the number of coin-type objects also increases. In addition, the coin-type object includes a number “10”, which indicates the number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a general prize opening. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general winning opening. Note that the number of prize balls that are awarded when a game ball wins each winning mouth (first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, general winning mouth, and big winning mouth) is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance. And

  In this way, by displaying the object corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and increasing the number of objects to be displayed in accordance with the increase in the winning number, the player can It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won and the number of game balls won to the general winning opening.

  When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, as described above, the number of game balls won and the total number of wins in each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to zero. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), all the coin-type objects displayed on the right side of the characters “general winning” are erased. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is zero.

  As described above, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-game state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been notified is reset to 0 (general It is possible to prevent a player who plays a game on the gaming machine from grasping the number of winnings in the general winning opening after that. .

  In this embodiment, by setting the game end determination condition and the above-described condition for shifting to the demo screen as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening that has been informed at the time of shifting to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset. In this way, when displaying the demo screen, the number of winning prizes received in the general winning award may be reset to zero.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 50), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 51 is not executed. . In these cases, the “general winnings” character itself shown in FIG. 51 is not displayed, and the coin-type object itself is also displayed regardless of the number of winnings in the general winning opening (total winnings in the display control table). Do not show.

  If the number of objects (normal objects) to be displayed for each winning prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, one special object (for example, an object having a different aspect from the normal object including the number “100”) may be displayed instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. Accordingly, a predetermined number of winning times and the number of winning balls corresponding thereto can be notified in one special object display area without requiring a predetermined number of normal object display areas.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of displayed objects increases by one for each winning of a general winning opening. An object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the number of displayed objects may be increased by one for every five winnings in the general winning opening.

  In addition, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters “display” on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected), as shown in FIG. 52, the period during which it is controlled to the big hit gaming state , The number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed together with the number of winnings in the large winning opening.

  FIG. 52 (1) shows a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first round game is started, the characters “general winnings” are displayed, and the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed on the right side thereof, and “large winnings” Is displayed, and on the right side, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is displayed. In this example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the jackpot gaming state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. In addition, [0 × 15] is displayed because the number of winning balls in the big winning game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls awarded when a game ball is won in the big winning gate is 15. Has been. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls [0 × 10] awarded in response to winning in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls [0 × 15] awarded in response to winning in the big winning mouth Since the total number of and is 0, [0 balls in total] is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball has won seven times in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 907), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A). Since the game ball has won once in the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the general winning number is 1, and the large winning number is updated to 7. In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] awarded according to the prize winning to the general prize opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] awarded according to the prize winning to the big prize mouth is 115. Therefore, [total 115 balls] is displayed. It should be noted that the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning the general winning opening [1 × 10 = 10 balls] and the number of winning balls awarded in accordance with winning in the big winning opening [7 × 15 = 105] May be displayed individually.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), as a result of the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are counted in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907) in the big hit gaming state. The game is won three times and the game balls are won three times in the general prize opening (the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D), so the number of general prizes is 3, and the number of big prizes is updated to 105. ing. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of winning balls awarded in response to winning a winning prize [105 × 15] Since the total number of and 1605 is 1605, a total of 1605 balls is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big winning gaming state separately from the number of winning in the large winning opening, the player can only receive the number of winning in the big winning opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes received in the general prize opening. In addition, by distinguishing and displaying the number of winning balls according to the number of winning prizes and the number of winning balls according to the number of winning winnings in the general winning slot, the player can win the winning prize. In addition to the number of prize balls given in response to this, there is an interest in the number of prize balls given in accordance with winning in the general prize opening.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings in the general winning award in the probability variation state or the short time state may be displayed on the image display device 905, not limited to the number of winning in the general winning opening in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 905 the number of winning in a general winning opening in a normal state. In addition, the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit gaming state, probability change state or short-time state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, or the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state). The number of winning prizes for the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. In addition, the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening during a period in which the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number corresponding to the number of the special figure games held) may be displayed on the image display device 905.

  As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 50), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled in the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 52 is displayed. Display control to be performed is not executed. In these cases, the number of “general winnings” shown in FIG. 52 is not displayed, but the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the winnings during the period when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In addition, the total number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winning prizes are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described. However, the image display device 905 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the example in which the number of winning balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is described. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

  In this way, only the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening may be displayed, and the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given in accordance with the winning to the general winning opening may not be displayed. . With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 905 must be changed according to the change. The situation of disappearing can be prevented. In contrast to this, only the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with winning in the general winning opening may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display change-over switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. The example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the winning number display / non-display switching is possible) has been described. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden switched). To the player).

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3), The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning award on the image display device 905, based on the fact that the operation section of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side. (Do not give priority to the game hall setting). At this time, it may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the game hall setting.

  When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. That the player is informed), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 50 (1), the selection screen of FIG. It is possible to make it impossible to select whether or not.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “not displayed” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2), the general winning prize is displayed. The number of winning prizes for the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control in FIGS. 51 and 52 is not executed).

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize according to the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize, giving priority to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the prize winning to the general winning opening is subsequently made on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 51 and 52 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is moved to the second position after that. In the case of (display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 51 and 52 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3). When the setting is made not to display, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 51 and 52 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screen of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is thereafter moved to the first position. In the case of (non-display position), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control in FIGS. 51 and 52 is not executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning a prize by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. On the player side, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. Whether or not to display may not be set (for example, a setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening only at the game hall side.

  Contrary to this, it is possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning a prize by operating the operation button 9030 by the player (and the store clerk of the game hall). On the other hand, there may be no means (for example, no display changeover switch 9032 is provided) that allows only the game hall side to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of such a configuration, whether or not the player and the store clerk at the game hall display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). It becomes possible to set. Thus, it may be possible to set whether or not the image display device 905 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905. However, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is the pachinko. An information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 901, for example, a card unit display device provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, and displayed as an information display. It may be displayed on the device. Also, the winning information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the information management device receives a general winning opening for each gaming machine. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is not provided with the mode changeover switch 9031. The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device or It may be displayed only on the information management apparatus.

  In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 according to the setting of the mode switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table according to the setting of the display switching switch 9032. The example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described. Thus, the winning prize management table and the display control table can be displayed without providing individual switches for controlling the display of each of the winning number management table and the display control table. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch to display, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 905. Is set to be non-displayed, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table may not be displayed on the image display device 905.

  In FIG. 53 (A), when a special symbol (outlier symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is determined by the main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100). An outlier variation pattern is illustrated. Further, FIG. 53B illustrates a jackpot variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. Has been. Since the special figure fluctuation time is determined for each fluctuation pattern, the presentation control CPU 90120 that has received the fluctuation pattern designation command can execute the presentation according to the special figure fluctuation time.

  Among the deviation variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out of effect, PX003 is a variation pattern that is out of normal reach and PX004 is a non-reach effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the big hit fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of normal reach big hit, and PY004 is a fluctuation pattern that is an effect mode of super reach big hit. Here, the super reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The normal reach variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

  The battle effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other and win or lose. In PX004, which is a variation pattern of superreach, a defeat effect is performed in which a teammate character loses to an enemy character, while in PY004, which is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, the teammate character wins against the enemy character. Production is performed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 90100. As a result, when the special symbol variable display is executed (before the fixed special symbol is stopped), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the big bonus symbol) It is possible to execute a fluctuating result notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled).

  In the change result notice effect shown in FIG. 54 (a), together with the change notice effect and the sound effect of the first mode in which only the sound effect in which the sound “Now is a chance!” Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, It is possible to execute the change notice effect of the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 901000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed. Due to the difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is established).

  The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the notice effect determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: variation result notice effect) based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the change result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), the mode of the change result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode The change result notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed, the execution of the fluctuation result notice effect is suspended or the change result notice effect is displayed. Do not execute.

  For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies “out of”, the audio effect is 80%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a sound effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 20%. On the other hand, if the variable display result specified by the last received variable display result notification command (the variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specifies “big hit”, the sound effect is 25%. The change notice effect of the 1st mode with only is performed, and the change notice effect of the 2nd mode with a voice effect and an accessory effect is performed in the ratio of 75%.

  Further, as described above, when the effective start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 90100, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the start winning opening designation command and the start winning prize. Receives the hour determination result specification command. As a result, before the special figure start condition is established, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a variable display fixed special symbol that has not yet been executed (that is, controlled to the big hit gaming state) ) Can be executed in advance.

  In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 54 (b), the first-order pre-reading notice effect in which only the sound effect in which the sound of “coming soon!” Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, along with the sound effect. The pre-reading notice effect in the second mode in which the accessory effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotation operation and lighting) is executed can be executed. Due to the difference in the production mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Yes.

  The effect control CPU 90120 pre-reads based on the notice effect determining random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: pre-read notice effect) based on the winning in the general prize opening is satisfied. The mode of the notice effect is determined. Specifically, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning at the general winning opening is established), and the determined aspect is A pre-reading notice effect is executed. Note that, as will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, execution of the prefetching notice effect is suspended or the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

  For example, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area does not include the start prize judgment result designation command for designating “big hit” (all start prizes for designating “out”) In the case of the time determination result designation command), the prefetching notice effect in the first mode with only the audio effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the second mode with the sound effect and the effect effect at a rate of 15% A pre-reading notice effect is executed. On the other hand, if the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area includes a start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the voice effect is 10%. The prefetching notice effect of the 1st mode accompanied only by is performed, and the prefetching notice effect of the 2nd mode accompanied by an audio effect and an effect effect is performed in the ratio of 90%.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing a specific effect that is executed based on the winning of a game ball in a general winning opening. The variation result notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol is executed as the specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a jackpot symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a jackpot, It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

  In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and notifies the number of winnings to the general winning opening. When the setting has been made (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 is used, the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of specific effect) is performed. Only when it is performed) the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the specific effect.

  As described above, every time the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the start winning opening designation command, the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are provided separately. For example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second When winning occurs in the order of the general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and Each of the winning history storage areas corresponding to the specific effect B has a winning history of [first general winning opening, second general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, third general winning opening, fourth]. Will be memorized.

  In an effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (the timing at which a winning in any winning opening occurs). ), Whether or not the winning condition is satisfied is determined, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the winning condition being satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which only the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a winning in any winning opening occurs) It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in an effect form in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, every time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one) At the timing of winning a prize at the winning opening), it is confirmed whether or not a winning condition corresponding to the specific effect A is established in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and corresponding to the specific effect A. The execution of the specific effect A is determined based on the established winning condition, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is established.

  Further, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. When the special symbol variable display (the variable decorative symbol display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is established, as described above, the specific effect A corresponding to the variable display result is displayed. The mode (only the audio effect or both the audio effect and the effect effect) is determined, the change result notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the fluctuation result notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is executed because there is no target for the change result notice effect. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag remains set. The effect control CPU 90120 can determine that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. And when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (the variable display of the decorative symbol associated therewith) is established, the aspect of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, The specific effect A that has been executed is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this form, and if the special symbol variable display (the decorative symbol variable display associated therewith) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. Without executing the specific effect A, the specific effect A may not be executed even when the variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when execution of the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. When the winning condition is satisfied, when the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1 or more, as described above, 1 The aspect of the specific effect B (only the sound effect or both the sound effect and the effect effect) according to the determination result at the time of starting winning is determined, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined aspect is executed, and the specific effect Clear the B execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without holding the pre-reading notice effect.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, there is no target of the pre-reading notice effect, so the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. State. The effect control CPU 90120 can determine that the execution of the specific effect B is determined by setting the specific effect B execution flag, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a suspended state. It has become. Then, when the start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening (when the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more), the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the start winning determination result, The specific effect B that has been put on hold is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

  In addition, it is not restricted to such a form, and when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without deferring the execution of the specific effect B, and thereafter Even if the start condition is satisfied and the number of stored memories becomes 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

  In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when power interruption is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a winning history storage area (a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and All winning histories stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flags (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 while the specific effect (variation result notice effect, pre-read notice effect) is being executed, or after the execution of the specific effect has not been executed yet. However, even if the power supply is restarted after that, the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, for a predetermined period after power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the specific effect is not executed because the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions are satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply is started, the specific effect is newly executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect form shown in FIG. 55, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (the first winning condition) is satisfied every time the player wins. When the first winning condition is satisfied, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, which is the first winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 each time the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the specific effect execution determination random number extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is the second winning condition). (Including winning history for any of them) is deleted.

  In the first effect form, and in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, (1) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the normal state is (2 ) It is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability changing state or the short time state. In the promiscuous state and the short-time state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting prize opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if the specific performance is executed, it is difficult to produce the same interest as in the normal state. For this reason, in the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution rate of the specific effect is reduced as compared with the normal state, and the interest reduction of the specific effect is suppressed.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, unlike the first effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution. Each of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, can execute a specific effect when a winning condition is established. (2) The winning condition in the probability variation state or the short-time state is (1) normal. More winnings are required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution ratio of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution ratio of the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short-time state.

  Thus, by making the execution ratio of the specific effects different according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening in the probability variation state or the short time state, ( 1) You may make it become higher than the ratio in which a specific production | presentation is performed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening in the normal state.

  In the second effect form to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect when the winning condition is satisfied. You may do it. For example, in the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the first winning condition required in the normal state and the second winning condition required in the probability changing state or the short time state are the same winning condition. As in the production mode, by making the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the normal state different from the lottery probability when the winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the ratio that the specific effect is normally executed and the probability variation You may make it differ from the ratio in which a specific effect is performed in a state or a time-short state.

  Further, the specific effects may be executed at different ratios depending on not only the gaming state but also the display result of variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is a loss symbol, When there is a hold memory determined to be a big win, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big win at the time of start winning (when there is only a hold memory determined to be a deviation at the start winning), The specific effect may be executed at a high rate. In addition, the number of times that the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or for different types of specific effects For example, it may be executed only once every time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect form shown in FIG. 55, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more general ones out of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. A winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when a game ball wins at least once each at the winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more general winning ports out of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, respectively. A winning condition (second winning condition) is established by winning the game ball two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  As described above, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of wins to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the normal state, and the probability change state or Because the number of winnings in the general winning opening required to execute the specific performance in the short-time state is different, it is possible to make interest in the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening depending on the gaming state. .

  Further, in the second effect form, in order to execute a specific effect, a game is performed at least once for each of two or more general winning ports of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D. Ball winning is a condition. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning awards as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only the presence or absence of the winning in the general winning award, but the game ball wins in any general award You can be interested in what you did.

  In the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the start of the big hit game state is designated based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the big hit game state. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. It is supposed to be.

  Also, in the second effect form, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased based on the change in the gaming state. . Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not necessarily established. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of confirming the winning history in the winning history storage area in the probability changing state or the short time state. The second winning condition is not always established based on the winning history only in the short-time state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the short time state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time shortening state to the normal state. Also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is established based on the winning history only in the probability variation state or the short-time state. You may make it confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect form shown in FIG. 55, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general within 120 seconds). The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 can enter the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established when the game ball has won five or more times in total. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the specific effect A timer times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. . On the other hand, when the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the winning condition is satisfied before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A Is erased.

  As described above, the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required for executing the specific effect in the probability variation state or the short time state. (The number of winning prizes) can be made interested in the winning frequency of the general winning opening according to the gaming state.

  Further, in the third effect form, when the specific effect A targeted for the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning award in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only for one variable display period) If there is a winning condition according to the winning history), a specific effect A is executed for a variable display different from the variable display that was executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds). In some cases, the winning conditions may be satisfied by winning histories in a plurality of variable display periods.

  It should be noted that, as in the third production mode, a special design is variably displayed a predetermined number of times as a mode in which the specific production is executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening in a predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. The specific effect may be executed when the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during the period reaches a predetermined number. For example, it is specified when the number of winnings in the general winning award reaches a predetermined number until all the reserved memory of the special figure game is exhausted, that is, within a period in which variable display of special symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is executed. An effect may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect form shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 90120, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). , The winning prize opening (one of the first starting prize opening and the second starting prize opening), the general winning opening (any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the order The winning condition (the first winning condition) is established by winning the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port), and starting winning port (first start). Any one of the winning a prize opening and the second start winning a prize opening), the general winning a prize opening (any of the first general award winning opening 9050A to the fourth general award opening 9050D), and the general winning a prize opening (the first general award winning opening 9050A to the fourth award). The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased.

  In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the other winning ports (the first starting winning port, the second starting winning port) different from the general winning port and the general winning port is a specific order. This makes it possible to give interest not only to the status of winning the general winning award but also to the winning order for the general winning award and other winning awards.

  It should be noted that a range may be provided for the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to the general winning opening and the number of times that a game ball wins continuously to another winning port. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning the general winning opening twice or more after winning the starting winning opening three or more times continuously. In addition, the winning condition may be determined regarding which of the plurality of general winning awards has been won or which of the plurality of other winning awards has been won. For example, a winning condition is established when a game ball wins a winning opening in the order of a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first general winning opening 9050A, and a second general winning opening 9050B. Also good. The winning conditions are not limited to the order in which the winning in the general winning opening occurs after the winning in the starting winning opening occurs, but the winning condition is determined by the winning in the starting winning opening after the winning in the general winning opening occurs. May be established.

  In addition, the winning conditions may be established based on the fact that the order of winning the game balls to the plurality of general winning holes becomes a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning conditions ((1) the game balls are awarded to the plurality of general winning ports in the order of the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B When the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning A winning condition (referred to as a second winning condition) may be established when a game ball wins a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the mouth 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

Further, the winning conditions may be established based on the winning order of the game balls in the plurality of general winning holes and the winning order of the game balls in the one or more starting winning holes being in a specific order. . For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition ((1) the game ball is won in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B) If the first winning condition is established) and the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the first general winning port 9050A, the first starting winning port, the second general winning port 9050B, Further, the winning condition (second winning condition) may be established by winning the game balls in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Good.

  In addition, the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the start prize opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general prize opening and entry to the grand prize opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the fact that the order of entering the general winning opening and entering the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B is a specific order. You may do it. In addition, when there is a specific area in which a big hit type (for example, a probable big hit) is determined based on the entry of a game ball, the order of entry into the general winning opening and the entry into the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

  In the first effect form to the fourth effect form, the example in which the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect has been described. However, the prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth effect form to eighth effect form]
In the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 56, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are not different and are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first winning conditions in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the winning conditions employed in the normal state are provided as common winning conditions, respectively. ing. Then, (1) if the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the change result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a certain change state or a short time state, a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the specific effect executed based on the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening. Interest can be improved.

  In the fifth effect form shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. When the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and All winning histories in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) a certain change state or a short-time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A , And the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state, Each time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased. On the other hand, if the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) the certain change state or the short-time state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, it corresponds to the specific effect A. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are erased.

  In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the big hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 has controlled the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 90120. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Further, in the sixth effect form to the eighth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the short time state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the seventh effect form, the specific effect timer is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. . Then, when the specific effect timer times out, the specific effect A and the specific effect B are not executed, and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are displayed. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning conditions are satisfied before the time-out of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All the winning histories in the winning history storage area are deleted. (2) In the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the specific effect B is executed and the winning history and the specific effect in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. All winning histories in the B winning history storage area are erased.

[9th effect form-12th effect form]
In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 57, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, (1) in the normal state and (2) in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state. The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is established in the normal state, the variation result notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short time state. When is established, a prefetch notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. Thereby, according to the gaming state when the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be made different, and the game ball has won the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance executed based on the above.

  In the ninth effect form shown in FIG. 57, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in either the first general winning port 9050A or the second general winning port 9050B. Each time a wins, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short time state, the effect control CPU 90120 each time the game ball wins one of the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined at a rate of 20%. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the tenth effect form shown in FIG. 57, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has 1 for each of the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B. When the game ball wins at least once, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball two or more times in both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Wins the winning condition (the second winning condition), and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 is controlled to the big hit game state, a big hit start specifying command for specifying the start of the big hit game state is sent to the effect control CPU 90120. Is received, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both erased. Also, in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not erased when the gaming state is changed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the winning history in the winning history storage area is erased based on the transition from the normal state to the probability changing state or the short time state, and the transition from the probability changing state or the time shortening state to the normal state. Also good.

  In the eleventh effect form shown in FIG. 57, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds. When a game ball wins a total of three or more times, a winning condition (first winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probability change state or the short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 wins the game ball a total of five times or more in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. As a result, a winning condition (second winning condition) is established, and execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the eleventh effect form, the timer for specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general prize opening is stored in the prize history storage area of specific effect A. When the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is erased without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the time-out of the timer for the specific effect A, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the prize history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds. When the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is erased without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is established in the probability variation state or the short-time state before the timeout of the timer for the specific effect B, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the prize history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Is done.

  In the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 57, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first start prize port, a first start prize port, a second general prize port 9050B, The winning conditions (the first winning condition) are established when the game balls win the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probability change state or a short-time state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a second start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a third general winning opening 9050C, and a fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game balls win the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  As in the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form, the general winning opening (the general winning opening and the start winning opening in the twelfth effect form) that is a target for winning the game ball for executing the specific effect is determined according to the gaming state. Thus, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the gaming state. In the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, in order to establish the second winning condition in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the target winning opening to be awarded in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state The example shows that the target winning mouths to be awarded are all different, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the target winning mouth in the normal state and the target winning mouth in the probability variation state or the short-time state are partially It may be common. For example, the first general winning condition and the second winning condition may include a winning in the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th effect form-16th effect form]
The thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form shown in FIG. 58 are ratios of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, it is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A.

  Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, specifically, the confirmed decorative pattern (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the variation pattern with the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) This is the period until the symbol is stopped. Further, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, specifically, a period during which variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach production (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is a period from the start of variable display of a variation pattern with reach production (normal reach, super reach) to before the reach state is established.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth effect form to the sixteenth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production form, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second winning condition. When the established timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th effect form to 20th effect form]
In the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form shown in FIG. 59, when the timing when the winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning condition is obtained. When the timing at which is established is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The winning conditions in the seventeenth effect form to the twentieth effect form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, respectively. In any production mode, when the timing when the winning condition (common winning condition) is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is established. When the performed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[21st effect form to 24th effect form]
The 21st effect form to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 60 execute the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is a period after the reach state is established in (1) reach fluctuation. When the timing at which the second winning condition is established is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

  The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the twenty-first effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the ninth effect form to the twelfth effect form, respectively. It has become. In any production mode, when the timing when the first winning condition is established is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second winning condition is established. If the completed timing is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, depending on the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, the execution ratio of the specific effects is made different, and by executing different types of specific effects according to the gaming periods when the winning conditions are satisfied, It is possible to improve interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening.

[25th effect form and 26th effect form]
In the 25th effect form shown in FIG. 61, unlike the 1st effect form to the 24th effect form, regardless of the gaming state and the game period, the general winning award (the first general winning award 9050A to the fourth general winning award 9050D). The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won three or more times in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. Further, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In the 26th effect form shown in FIG. 61, unlike the first effect form to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general) within 120 seconds irrespective of the gaming state and the game period. The first winning condition is established when the game ball has won a total of three or more times at the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect A is determined. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is erased. In addition, regardless of the game state and the game period, the second prize is awarded because the game ball has won a total of five times or more in the general prize opening (the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The condition is met. When the second winning condition is satisfied, execution of the specific effect B is determined. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is erased.

  In this way, regardless of the game state and the game period, the number of winnings to the general winning a prize mouth is executed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning award and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within a predetermined period). And interest in winning prizes. In this example, the production mode (output audio) differs according to the number of winnings to the general prize opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified differs (specific production A: variable display being executed, Specific presentation B: variable display that has not been executed), but is not limited to this, depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, whether or not to suggest the display result of the variable display is different ( For example, it may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and an effect not related to the display result of the variable display, and an effect (for example, high probability) indicating whether or not the game state is suggested. It may be possible to execute an effect for notifying that the state is present and an effect not related to the gaming state).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general prize opening designation command and receives a general prize opening, and the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls has been won, and upon receipt of the start winning port designation command, a winning to the starting winning port has occurred, and either the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port has a game It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won, and it is possible to specify that a winning to the big winning opening has occurred by receiving the winning prize winning command. Therefore, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 62 can be stored as the winning number management table and can be updated.

  The second start winning opening is formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, and the normally variable winning ball device 906B is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or can be easily won from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the state. Further, the special winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 907, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is controlled to be opened (the game ball can be won or won easily from a closed state where the game ball is not won or difficult to win). The game ball can be won by switching to the open state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62, the second start winning opening and the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 are classified into the prize winning holes through which the game balls can be won by the operation of the winning combinations. On the other hand, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D and the first starting winning opening are always open, and a non-community winning prize opening through which a game ball can be won regardless of the operation of an accessory. It is divided into.

  In the winning number management table of FIG. 62, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening. The number of prize balls given at times (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, which is 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (in this example, 11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), which is the number of times that a game ball has won the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out by winning the game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

  The winning ratios are as follows: (1) The number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420), respectively, with respect to the total number of winning prizes in each winning mouth (1572 in this example). And (2) the non-commodity prize opening (the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D and the first start prize) with respect to the total number of prizes of each prize opening (in this example, 1572) The number of winning prizes (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the percentage of winning numbers (315 + 420) of the winning prize winning opening (the second starting winning prize opening and the big winning prize opening), and (3) the total number of winning prizes for each winning prize ( In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the big winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) and the ratio of the winning number of the big winning opening (420) with respect to 1572) are stored.

  Also, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning mouth (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning mouth (9268 in this example) And (2) non-commodity prize opening (first general prize opening 9050A to fourth general prize opening 9050D and first start prize) with respect to the total number of payouts of each prize opening (9268 in this example) The number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 1140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) for the prize winning awards (630 + 6300), and (3) the total number of payouts for each award ( In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the big winning mouth (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) and the percentage of the payout number of the big winning mouth (6300) with respect to 9268) are stored.

  Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is at the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Display on the device 905. Accordingly, the store clerk at the game hall is paid out when the game ball is won at the prize winning port with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out when the game ball is won at each winning port. The ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as “first payout ratio”, which is 74.77% in this example) can be grasped. In addition, the number of balls (6300) paid out by winning the game ball at the big prize opening with respect to the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball at each prize opening. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as “second payout ratio”, which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

  Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. . In the example of FIG. 62, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame. In addition, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the fact in an identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 62, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted with a thick frame.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and displays the comparison result between the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. For example, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed on the image display device 905 by the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the setting operation by the operation button 9030, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031. The first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the game hall side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to a game device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for game use. In the apparatus, the received first payout ratio and second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and the information management device uses the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. The ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device.

  Further, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general prize opening designation command, a start prize opening designation command, and a big prize opening prize command to the effect control CPU 90120, external output information corresponding to these commands is output. As an information, it is possible to specify that a winning at the general winning opening has occurred and which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D has been won, and a winning at the start winning opening has occurred. And information that can specify whether the game ball has won in the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening, and information that can specify that the winning to the big winning opening has occurred The data is output to an external device such as a card unit or a call lamp device or an information management device (hall computer).

  This makes it possible to specify information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, information corresponding to the big winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received this information, it is possible to store the winning number management table of the form shown in FIG. 62 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. In addition, for each gaming machine, it can be determined whether the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

  In addition, regarding the counting period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 48 or FIG. 62) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the counting period, the pachinko It is a period from when the power supply of the gaming machine 901 is started until the power supply is stopped. As the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is reset (the number of winnings at each winning opening becomes 0), and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed. In some cases, the number of winnings for each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is zero. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is erased without being backed up.

  The total period of the winning number information (values of each item in FIG. 48 or FIG. 62) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the game hall side. It is possible to set a total period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) regarding the gaming machine using the button 9030. In addition, in a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device), a shop clerk inputs a desired counting period with an input device or the like, and the input counting period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 901, and the counting period May be set (stored in the RAM 90122). Also, in the information management device (hall computer), the game hall manager inputs a desired total period using an input device or the like, and the input total period is the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, the pachinko machine selected as the setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as a totaling period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table is created for each set counting period (for example, 10 hours), and these are displayed on the image display device 905, or a corresponding gaming device (card) Unit, call lamp device) and displayed on the display device of the gaming device, or output to the information management device (hall computer) and displayed on the display device of the information management device. .

  Also, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is output based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the start winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the big winning opening winning command outputted from the pachinko gaming machine 901. In an external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 48 or FIG. 62), by setting a total period using an input device included in the external apparatus, each set total period (for example, 10 hours) is set. A winning number management table can be created and displayed on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or calling lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number management table for the corresponding gaming machine for each predetermined period is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages gaming information for each gaming machine, the winning number management table for each predetermined period can be displayed on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th effect form]
The specific effects A and B described above both give notice of variable display results in the special game according to the effect mode, and are executed in connection with winning of game balls to the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D. As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game. FIG. 63 illustrates a specific effect C (point giving effect) as an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game.

  In the 27th effect form shown in FIG. 64 and the 29th effect form to be described later, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 every time a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The presence / absence of execution of the specific effect C is determined based on the execution determination random number, and the specific effect C is executed if it is determined to be executed. When the specific effect C is executed, 1 is added to the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122, and as shown in FIG. 63, the image display device 905 includes an image including the characters “1point”. 902000 is displayed.

  In other words, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery for whether or not 1 point is given is performed, and the lottery is won. In this case, a point form effect in which 1 point is given is performed. A privilege is given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

  For example, when the total number of points reaches 5 (when 5 points are won), a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server is displayed on the image display device 905. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal that he owns, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. . When the total point reaches 10 (when 10 points are won), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the rate is 80%. The specific effect C is executed. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in a special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of a special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A and B, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects C is provided. Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is a winning condition) History is included).

  Here, the total points in the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 are set to 10 regardless of the winning history in the winning history storage area (even if the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted). After reaching (in this example, a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and 1 is added again each time the specific effect C is executed.

  In the 27th effect form and the 29th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the specific effect is based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol change period). The rate of execution is lower than (2) the rate of execution of a specific effect based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol change period). Is set. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed in the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (2), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special game that is the object of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special game such as a specific effect A is adopted as a specific effect, the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is (2) variable symbol variable display is executed When the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no change result notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize winning in the general prize opening is stopped) or the execution is suspended until the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied (the general winning award). The specific effect is not executed at the timing of winning the mouth, and the specific effect is subsequently executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the twenty-seventh effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is executed (symbol fluctuation) If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Also good. Also, contrary to the example shown in the 27th effect form, (1) specified based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the effect is executed is (2) the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during a period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be higher.

[28th effect form]
In the twenty-eighth effect form, unlike the twenty-seventh effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the twenty-eighth production form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is being executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The specific effect A is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the specific effect A is either the first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed or the second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. Thus, the variation result notice effect suggests that the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is suggested before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 54B, the specific effect B is one of the first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed and the second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. Thus, the pre-reading notice effect suggests that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 63, the specific effect C is a variable display display result (whether it becomes a big win symbol) related to the special game, and a variable display display result (whether it becomes a win symbol) related to the normal game. It is an effect not related to any of the above, and points are awarded to the player in accordance with winning in the general winning opening.

  As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (described above “ The execution of the specific effect A is deferred, and the process of “execute when the variable display start condition for the special game is satisfied” is not performed), and is specified only in the period (1). Production A is to be executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 28th effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening as the specific effect, I am trying to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then specified when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. When the production A is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific production. Therefore, in the twenty-eighth effect form, the specific effect A is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period).

  In the 28th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20% when the period is (2) (outside the symbol change period). In the case of such a form, when a winning in a general winning opening occurs during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening) The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning a prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition for the special figure game is satisfied. As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the period (1) (within the symbol variation period) or the period (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Alternatively, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at a different rate.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), a special feature being executed is further displayed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may vary depending on the variable display result of the figure game or whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. For example, if the CPU 90120 for effect control determines that the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the confirmed decorative symbol is assumed to be an off symbol. If it is determined, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th effect form]
In the 29th effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). Is within the period of 1 or more, (2) In the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (within the symbol variation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  That is, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is determined to be executed ((1) or (2) above) ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the special symbol variable display is not executed and the special symbol variable display is performed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. If it is not determined to execute (in the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

  Each time the specific effect C is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is a winning condition) History is included).

  In the 29th effect form, when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the special symbol variable display is executed, or at least the special symbol variable display is determined to be executed ((1) above) Or, when the specific effect is executed during the period of (2)), the special symbol variable display is not executed and the special symbol variable display is performed at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. It is set lower than the rate at which the specific effect is executed when the execution is not determined (in the case of the period (3)). In the period (1) and (2), an effect corresponding to a special game (for example, a change result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 or the speakers 908L and 908R. The player is usually more interested in these effects including variable display of decorative symbols rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period (3), the player can execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is the target of interest is not executed. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect is appropriately increased by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods (1) and (2).

  Further, by executing a specific effect C (point giving effect) that is not related to a variable display result in a special game or a variable display result in a normal game as a specific effect, depending on the execution status of the special game and the number of reserved memories. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more as in the specific effect B is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories In the period in which is 0, there is no target of prefetching notice at this timing. For this reason, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the winning in the general prize opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the reserved memory count becomes 1 or more (the general winning a prize is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the variable display start condition for the special game is established). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the interest may decrease due to the divergence between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. By adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the general game as the specific effect, such a problem can be avoided.

  In the 29th stage, the special symbol is variably displayed or at least the special symbol is variably displayed at the timing when the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. If it is decided to execute (in the period (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executable only when it is not determined to execute the variable display (in the case of the period (3)). Contrary to the example shown in the 29th effect form, is the variable symbol display being executed at the timing when the game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D? Or, when it is decided to execute variable display of at least a special symbol (when it is the period (1) or (2) above), the variable symbol is displayed in proportion to the specific performance. If it is not determined to execute the variable display of the special symbol (in the case of the period (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed.

  In addition, the timing at which variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including the same time). In this case, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game. In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the start condition is established) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including the same time). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the reserved memory number increases without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special game immediately after the start condition is established (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the game is related to the special figure game.

[30th effect form]
In the 30th effect form, unlike the 29th effect form, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the specific effect execution extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the 30th production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), (3) the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0 and the special symbol variable display is not being executed (outside the symbol variation period) If it is, the specific effect B is not executed.

  As described above, the specific effect B is not executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2) or (3). (The above-described process of “suspending execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more” is not performed) and only in the period of (1), The specific effect B is executed. Each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D which is the winning condition) History is included).

  In the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is specified by executing the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. I try to improve my interest in production. However, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) in which the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no target of the prefetch notice at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general prize opening), and then the specific effect B is displayed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. When it is executed, there is a risk that the interest will be lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific performance. Therefore, in the 30th effect form, the specific effect B is not executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0). .

  In the 30th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). The specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and if it is the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 20%. You may do it. In the case of such a form, when the general winning opening is generated during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding storage), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. As described above, the timing at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without reserved memory). ), The specific effect B can be executed in any case, and the specific effect B may be executed at a different rate.

  Further, when the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved storage), the holding is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B varies depending on the variable display result of the special game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbols accompanying the execution of the special game related to the reserved memory. You may do it. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a start winning prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” in the start winning command storage area (that is, the reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special game is a big hit symbol). ), The specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and the start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” is not stored in the start prize command storage area (ie, In the case where there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st effect form]
In the 31st effect form shown in FIG. 65, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable symbol variable display is executed ( If it is within the symbol change period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) In some cases, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) and the period (2). Different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth winning condition 904A, which is a winning condition) corresponding to the specific effect. The winning history for any of the general winning ports 9050D is included).

  In the 31st effect form, by executing the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game being executed at the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening, I am trying to improve my interests. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is a period (2) during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), there is a subject of the change result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effects are executed, the execution frequency of the specific effects decreases. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the general winning opening), and then the special game is related. When the specific effect A is executed when the variable display start condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the 31st effect form, when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), instead of the specific effect A, the variable display result in the special game or the variable in the normal game By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd form]
In the thirty-second production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). ) Is within a period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the reserved memory number is 0. Is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (change result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved memories is 0 When the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1), the period (2), In the case of the period 3), different types of specific effects are executed. Thereby, it can be interested in the effect performed when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and it can improve interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning that is the winning condition) The winning history is included in any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D).

  In the thirty-second effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the pre-reading notice exists, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice) If the current period is within the period of (2), that is, if there is no target of the pre-reading notice but the target of the change result notice exists, the specific effect A (fluctuation result notice effect) When the period is (3), that is, when neither the target of the pre-reading notice nor the subject of the change result notice exists, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed.

  In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately at the timing when a game ball is won in the general prize opening, and executing this, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest when the game ball wins the general prize opening. I try to let them. It should be noted that any type of specific production is always executed (percentage is executed at a rate of 100%) every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening, and any type of specific presentation is given every time a prize is awarded to the general prize opening. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

  In the thirty-second effect form, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball is won at the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless, that is, regardless of whether or not there is a subject of the change result notice, the prefetch notice effect is executed. That is, in the case where “the target of the change result notice and the object of the prefetch notice exist both”, the prefetch notice effect is preferentially executed. Not only in such a form, but when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, when variable display of special symbols is executed at that timing, the change result notice When the effect is executed and the variable symbol special display is not executed at the timing, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. That is, in the case where “the subject of the change result notice and the target of the prefetch notice exist both”, the change result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modified example of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
In the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be varied according to the state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The “state” here is a state that is generated as a result of a game in the gaming machine and is based on a game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect is varied according to the state category. For example, in the 27th effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, if the game state at that time is a normal state, the specific effect is 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the symbol variation period (2), if the gaming state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the gaming state at that time is a certain change state or a short time state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the twenty-seventh effect form to the thirty-second effect form, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be varied according to the state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect form, when the timing at which a game ball wins a general winning opening is within (1) the symbol change period, if the reserved memory number at that time is 0, the specific effect A (change result notice) If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside (2) the symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed, If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (prefetching notice effect) is executed. According to this, the interest when a game ball wins a general winning opening can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the state classification for changing the type of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state. Or (1) whether the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) whether the number of reserved memories is 0. For example, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. Good. Furthermore, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference between these categories.

  Whether or not the specific effect C (point granting effect) is executed is switched according to the display setting table of FIG. 49, similarly to the other specific effects A and B executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 in the setting screen of FIG. 50). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect C can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  In addition, the specific effect C (point granting effect) is not limited to one point that is awarded for one prize to the general prize opening, but 2 points or 3 points are given for one prize to the general prize opening. It may be done. The number of points awarded may be different depending on, for example, which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the game ball has won the general winning opening, for example, The gaming state may be different depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short time state.

  Further, in the specific effect C (point giving effect), points may be awarded according to factors other than winning the general prize opening. For example, points are awarded according to winning at the start prize opening. Alternatively, points may be awarded according to the establishment of the reach state.

[33rd effect form]
In FIG. 66, a specific effect D (gauge update effect) is illustrated as an effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of a game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 66, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is a filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. This effect can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 10.

  In the example of FIG. 66 (a), the filling area 902100a (black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is in the 0 stage in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 9050A to 9050D. It increases from 1 (the state where the white part occupies 10/10) to 1 level (the state where the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge + 1). In the example of FIG. 66 (b), the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is changed from the 0th stage to the 3rd stage (black portion) in response to the game ball winning in any of the first general winning ports 9050A to 9050D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

  As described above, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and reaches 10 levels (the black portion in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In the case where the player is in a state of being), a privilege is given to the player. For example, similarly to the specific effect C described above, a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server is displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can select the desired image or music from the image providing server or the music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

  Not limited to this, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special song is output as the BGM during the game. It may be possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game being executed at the timing when the filling region 902100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in which the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 902100a reaches 10 stages may be a big hit symbol.

  That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special game or the variable display result in the normal game. It may be an effect related to a variable display result in a game or a variable display result in a usual game. In addition, it may be an effect related to the gaming state or an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, every time the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a different effect may be executed. Further, different effects may be executed according to the gaming state when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels.

  When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect is given by displaying a message on the image display device 905, outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the like, and then the gauge image 902100. The filling region 902100a at is reset to the zero level. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases again in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

  67 to 68, in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, each time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 90124 It is determined whether or not the stage of the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 (hereinafter referred to as “gauge level”) is to be increased by one stage based on the random number for effect execution determination. Is increased by one step from the current level. That is, every time a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to increase the gauge level by one step. If you win, your gauge level will increase by one level.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is being executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) when it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), a rate of 80%. Increases the gauge level by one step. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in a special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of a special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed.

  As with the specific effects A to C, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effects D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 stages, along with a notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 33rd effect form, and in the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during the period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period) The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in (2) is that the game ball won in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) The gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, during the period of (2), the player can increase the gauge level by not producing an effect corresponding to the special game of interest that would otherwise be preferential. I am in a situation where I am interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (1), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 33rd effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which variable display of special symbols is being executed (symbol fluctuation) (Within the period), the gauge level is not increased. (2) The gauge level can be increased when the special symbol variable display is not performed (outside the symbol variation period). Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed (within the symbol variation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that (2) the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) You may set so that.

[34th form]
In the 34th effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is as follows: (1) A period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol changing period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

  The effect control CPU 90120 receives a change start command for specifying start of change in a special figure game, and a change pattern specification command for specifying a change pattern such as a change time of a special symbol in the special figure game and a decorative pattern in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a period during which the special symbol variable display is being executed, and until the special symbol variable display ends (the confirmed special symbol is It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, when the variation start command and the variation pattern designation command are received, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the variation time of the special symbol designated by the variation pattern designation command as the value of the variation time timer. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the special symbol variable display ends (until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed). In addition, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 34th production form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is 10 seconds or longer until the symbol stops is (3) when the symbol level is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops In addition, the gauge level is set to be higher than the rate at which the game level is won based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), there is a grace period until the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level, the player is easily interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (3), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 34th production mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  Moreover, in the 34th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). When the display result of variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%. When the display result is out of symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is awarded. When the timing at which a game ball wins any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is a jackpot symbol May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% when the display result is out of the design.

[35th form]
As described above, the specific effect B is exemplified as the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 54B, does the start prize determination result designation command for designating “big hit” be included in the start prize determination result designation command stored in the start prize command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode (sound effect only) or the second mode (sound effect and accessory effect). That is, in the pre-reading notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target fluctuation) that is the target of the pre-fetching notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target fluctuation. It has become difficult.

  As the pre-reading notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect that notifies the target fluctuation. For example, as described above, the start winning memory display area 905H includes a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Is provided. When the start control winning determination result designation command is received, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the display region corresponding to the command corresponding to the command designating the “outage” if the command designates “big hit”. It is possible to execute a hold change effect displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special manner, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display count executed until the target variation.

  For example, if a command for designating “big hit” is received when a start winning determination result designation command is received, a display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special manner at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if a command specifying “out of” is received when the start winning determination result specifying command is received, the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in the normal mode. As described above, when the display part corresponding to the reserved memory generated by the start winning is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Each time), and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is satisfied, The display part disappears from the start winning storage display area 905H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the start of the variable display game corresponding to the start winning.

  That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion (the target of the hold change effect is displayed in a special manner). Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to variable display hold storage that is not the target of hold change effect) to the left of the display information corresponding to variable display hold storage) The remaining number of variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is executed can be grasped.

  In addition, the timing which displays a display site | part in a special aspect is not restricted at the time of a start winning prize. For example, the display part may be displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode after passing through a predetermined effect. May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing of shifting to the left). In these aspects, from the timing at which the display portion corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice changes from the normal state to the special form, the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

  In the thirty-fifth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is as follows: If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the pending change effect and it is not a target variation execution period), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there is a special game in which the start condition is established before the special game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one step.

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1. If there is one special figure game in which the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge is measured at a rate of 20%. Level increases by one level.

  In addition, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) an execution period of target variation accompanying the end of the prefetching notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10% when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 35th production mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) until the target change The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball is won at the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count of 1 is 1, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) During the period), the gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the game ball is won at the general winning opening. In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 35th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased. In the case of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until target change is 2 or more is (3) remaining variable until target change. The ratio may be set such that the gauge level increases when the number of display times is 1, and (4) the gauge level decreases when the target variation is executed.

  Moreover, in the 35th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) )), The gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control displays the variable display result in the target variation when the timing when the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of a big win symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and when the variable display result is out of the design, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, and the first general winning opening 9050A to 4th general When the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target variation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%, When the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth one When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the winning openings 9050D is in the period (4), if the variable display result in the target variation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 15%, If the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level may be increased at a rate of 10%.

[36th effect form]
In the thirty-sixth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%. In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In some cases, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period during which (3) variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with a reach effect is being executed and the reach state In the period after establishment, the gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening before the reach state in reach change is established is (4) The gauge level is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a rate higher than the period of (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the thirty-sixth production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), increasing the gauge level. In the case of the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the thirty-sixth effect form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the reach fluctuation period and before the reach state is established is (4 ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach variation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[37th effect form]
In the 37th effect form shown in FIG. 68, the ratio of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%.

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 80%.

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least ten winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 37th effect form, the rate of increase of the gauge level is different between (1) the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general prize opening 9050B or the third general prize opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between when the game ball wins 9050C and when the game ball wins the first general winning port 9050A or the fourth general winning port 9050D. The rate at which the gauge level increases depending on the general winning opening where the game ball has won, so that the player will be interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won and improve the interest. be able to.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the edge of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win game balls in the mouth 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game balls win in the first general prize opening 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D Is made higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, thereby providing an interest in winning a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise.

  In the 37th production mode, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and in the second general winning opening or the third general winning opening. When a game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Contrary to the example shown in the 37th effect form, the rate of increase in the gauge level when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Or you may set so that it may become lower than the rate which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C.

[38th production form]
In the thirty-eighth effect form to the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. Moreover, in the 38th production form-the 42nd production form, the gauge level which increases according to one prize-winning to a general winning opening is not restricted to one step. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), there are cases where the gauge level is increased by three stages in response to a single winning at the general winning opening.

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1), and (2) when the variable symbol special display is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the gauge level is three steps. Increase (gauge + 3).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) a general winning opening during a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol change period) The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in (2) is that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) Is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on During the period of (1), the player usually has a general prize because an effect corresponding to the special game (for example, a change result notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative symbols, rather than the winning status of game balls in the mouth. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period (1), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player corresponding to the special game that is the subject of interest is not executed in the original period, so that the player is increased by increasing the gauge level. Are in a situation where they are interested in this. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (1).

  In the thirty-eighth production mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which variable display of a special symbol is being executed (design variation) (Within a period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one step is changed is 80%), and (2) a period during which variable symbol special display is not executed ( If it is outside the symbol variation period), the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels may be, for example, 80% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 20%). Contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect form, (1) a gauge based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a general winning opening during a period during which a variable display of a special symbol is executed (within a symbol variation period). The number of stages in which the level increases is (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening during the period when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol change period) May be set to be larger.

  In addition, as a privilege granted when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege with a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code capable of downloading only an image may be displayed, and a two-dimensional code capable of downloading an image and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is greater than the former. You may make it suggest the magnitude | size of the privilege value provided when a gauge level reaches 10 steps by the number of steps in which a gauge level increases. For example, when the timing at which a game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate at which the gauge level is increased by two or more levels is set to, for example, 20% (the rate at which only one level is changed is 80%). When the rate of increase is, for example, 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) when the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period), the privilege value is small For example, if the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (the rate of changing only one step is 50%) and the privilege value is large, the gauge level is increased to two steps. Ratio, for example 80% to above increase (percentage of changing one step 20%) may be.

[39th form]
In the thirty-ninth presentation mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol variation period) ), The gauge level increases by three levels (gauge + 3). The timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) and is special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge + 2). The timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol changing period) and When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history (including at least four winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is deleted.

  In the 39th production form, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops It is set to be higher than the number of gauge levels that increase based on the fact that a game ball has won a general winning opening. During the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed in a stopped state will be, rather than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than the period (3).

  In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more stages. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 39th production mode, (2) the number of stages at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops ( 3) It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening when it is less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops.

  In the thirty-ninth presentation mode, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In such a case, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the decorative symbol being executed when the timing at which the game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). When the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three levels, and when the display result is out of the pattern, the gauge level is increased by two levels, while the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general When the timing at which a game ball is won in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is set in two levels. The gauge level may be increased by one step when the display result is out of the design.

[40th effect form]
In the 40th effect form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the pre-reading notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If it is a non-period (when there is no display part of a special mode in the on-hold change effect and it is not an execution period of target variation), the gauge level increases by four stages (gauge + 4).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more. If there are two or more special-figure games in which the start condition is established before the special-figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is 3 Increase in steps (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display count until the target change is 1. If there is one special figure game where the start condition is established before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the pending change effect, the gauge level is increased by two stages. (Gauge +2).

  In addition, when the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect) The gauge level is increased by one level (gauge + 1) when the variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special mode is established).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the number of remaining variable display until target change is 2 or more is (3) target change When the remaining variable display count up to 1 is 1, the number of gauge levels increases based on the winning of a game ball in the general prize opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until target change is 0 (target change The number of gauge levels is set to be increased based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at a general winning opening during the execution period of (1). In the period of (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the target variation that is currently being executed than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. For this reason, even if the gauge level is increased in the period of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific performance is appropriately increased.

  In the 40th production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing at which the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). For example, the ratio of increasing the gauge level by two or more stages is set to 20% (only one stage) in the period of (3) and (4). The rate of change may be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target change. It may be set so that the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the number of times of variable display is 1, and (4) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases in the execution period of target variation.

  Moreover, in the 40th production form, the timing at which the game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is in any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4) )), The gauge level may be increased at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation or not. For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control displays the variable display result in the target variation when the timing when the game ball wins any one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). In the case of a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by four steps, and when the variable display result is out of the symbol, the gauge level is increased by three steps, and any one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D When the timing when the game ball is won is in the period of (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by three stages, and the variable display result becomes a symbol out of place The gauge level is increased by two stages, and the game is played in one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the timing when the ball is won is in the period of (4), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by two steps, and if the variable display result becomes a dissimilar symbol The gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st effect form]
In the 41st effect form, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period) ), The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4). In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period in which (2) variable display (non-reach fluctuation) without a reach effect is being executed. In this case, the gauge level is increased by three levels (gauge + 3).

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a period during which (3) variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed, and If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge +3), and (4) a variable display (reach fluctuation) with reach effect is being executed and the reach state is established. In the subsequent period, the gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the forty-first production mode, (3) the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in reach change is (4) after the reach state is established in reach change. The number is set more than the number of stages of gauge levels that increase based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. During the period of (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that are not stopped after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is greatly increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific performance may be impaired. On the other hand, since the reach state is not established in the period (3), the player is easily interested in this by increasing the gauge level. For this reason, the interest level of the specific performance is appropriately increased by increasing the gauge level more than in the period (4).

  In the 41st production mode, the gauge level is increased by two or more stages when the timing when the game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3). For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step) May be 80%). Contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and before the reach state is established, 4) It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is being executed and after the reach state is established.

[42nd effect form]
In the forty-second effect form shown in FIG. 70, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning ports is won. When the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) a period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period) The gauge level increases by one step (gauge + 1). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the special symbol variable display is executed (within the symbol variation period). The gauge level is increased by two levels (gauge +2).

  In addition, the timing at which a game ball wins one of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). , The gauge level increases by 3 levels (gauge + 3). On the other hand, the timing at which a game ball has won one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) a period during which the special symbol variable display is not executed (outside the symbol changing period). The gauge level is increased by 4 levels (gauge + 4).

  In addition, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and provision of a privilege (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading an image or music, display of a special character, output of a special music, etc.) Accordingly, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

  In the 42nd production form, the number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between (1) the symbol variation period and (2) outside the symbol variation period, and further, the second general prize opening 9050B or the third general prize The number of steps of increasing gauge level is different between the case where a game ball wins the mouth 9050C and the case where a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. By increasing the number of gauge levels to be increased according to the number of general winning holes that the game balls have won, the player will be interested in which general winning holes the game balls have won, and improve the interest. Can be made.

  For example, the first general prize provided closer to the edge of the game area 9010 than the winning of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general prize opening 9050A and the fourth general prize opening 9050D By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, it is possible to win for a general winning opening that is more difficult to win. It is good to raise interest.

  In the forty-second production mode, when a game ball is won in the first general winning opening or the fourth general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20). %), And when a game ball is won in the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%) Also good. Contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production mode, the number of stages at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. You may set so that it may become less than the number of steps which a gauge level increases when a game ball wins 9050B or the 3rd general winning opening 9050C.

[Modification of the 33rd effect form to the 42nd effect form]
In the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, the division serving as a reference for determining whether to increase the gauge level, and the number of gauge levels to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form are determined. The classification used as a reference for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the category for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level, and the category for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased include (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2) the gaming state is It may be a classification of whether the state is a certain change state or a short time state. Further, it may be classified as (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. Good.

  Note that the gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling area 902100a is at least in the zero stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 902100 is not displayed when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (gauge An effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

  The effect of increasing the display of the gauge image 902100 and the gauge level is executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, and may not be executed in a period in which the predetermined effect is not being executed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period (predetermined stage stage) in which the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image. Or the gauge level may be increased. In addition, a game ball is won in the general winning opening only during a period in which the display portion in the start winning memory display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white indicating that there is a possibility of changing to a special mode). The gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 is simultaneously executed when an unillustrated RTC (real time clock) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time (simultaneously when a predetermined time is reached in a game machine of the same model). In the case of performing (effect), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous effect, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

  Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, different production sounds may be output depending on the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by three steps, the gauge level is increased by one step. Thus, the volume of the production sound may be increased.

  In addition, it is preferable to output an effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special game or the effect sound related to the ordinary game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the usual game, but smaller than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game. Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level is larger than the volume of the effect sound related to the special game, but may be smaller than the volume of the error sound that notifies the gaming machine error.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the sound volume in the normal state may be larger than the sound volume in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  In addition, the specific effect in which the effect mode changes step by step in accordance with the winning of the general prize opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the displayed character mode is step by step. It may be one that changes (for example, the size of the displayed character increases, or the item that the character owns changes), and the number of characters that the player can select increases gradually. Also good. Moreover, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed step by step, or the light emission color of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Moreover, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R may be changed stepwise.

  Whether or not execution of the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is performed according to the display setting table of FIG. 49 is performed in the same manner as other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is like that. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 in the setting screen of FIG. 50). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not to execute the specific effect D can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

[43rd effect form]
The specific effects A to D described above are effects that are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. It may be. For example, when the game ball is not won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the game period of 10 minutes, as shown in FIG. A specific effect E for displaying on the image display device 905 an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and a notification image 902200 including the characters “no general winnings” can be executed.

  As described above, the specific effect is not limited to an effect that is executed based on a game ball having won a general winning opening, but an effect that is executed based on a game ball that has not won a general winning opening (general winning game) It may be an effect that suggests difficulty in winning a prize in the mouth. That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event such as winning a game ball to a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or no game event occurs).

  In the 43rd effect form shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period in which a game ball has not won the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the game control microcomputer 90100. When any of the designated command and the big prize winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started. If the general prize opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (before 10 minutes have elapsed from the timer set), 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and again Start the timer.

  On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out due to the fact that the non-winning determination timer has timed out because the non-winning determination timer has not received before the non-winning determination timer times out, a notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is again set as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the notification image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the non-winning determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball has won the general winning opening.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped, the process (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) due to the non-winning determination timer timing out is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the time-out when the timer value becomes 0). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. In the state where the update of the non-winning determination timer is paused, when the production control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big prize winning prize command The renewal of the non-winning determination timer is resumed.

  In other words, the non-winning determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (the game is not determined to be finished). A time-out occurs when the number of winnings at the winning opening becomes 0 (the effect control CPU 90120 detects the time-out). As a result, when the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed if no winning in the general winning opening occurs for 10 minutes.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. It may be. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the launching motor included in the hitting ball launching device is operating). Good.

  In this way, when the player is playing a game and no winning in the general winning opening occurs in a predetermined period (10-minute gaming period), the specific effect E is executed, Informs that no winning in the general winning opening has occurred. By this notification, the player can grasp that the winning to the general winning opening has not occurred, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 where the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nails are made so that the frequency of winning the general winning a prize becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when a game is being played by the player and no winning in the general winning opening has occurred, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not being played by the player. When no winning is made to the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the processing based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the player has not won a game due to no game being played, and in this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that a winning in the general winning opening has not occurred despite the game being performed by the player.

[44th form]
The specific effect E is not limited to notifying that a general winning opening has not been won within a predetermined period (the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than 1), You may make it alert | report that it can specify that the number of winnings to a winning opening is less than predetermined number. In the 44th effect form, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning port designation command and a general winning port from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0). When either the designated command or the big prize winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to zero. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time a general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

  Then, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 is within the predetermined period in the specific effect E. That the number of winnings is less than the predetermined number and / or the number of winnings within the predetermined period is notified. For example, the message “30 minutes of general winnings is less than 3” and / or “30 minutes of general winnings is only 1” is displayed on the image display device 905.

  When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is again set as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time after the specific effect E is started. On the other hand, if the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3), the specified number E of the winning number determination timer is not executed without executing the specific effect E. Set the value again to 30 minutes and start the timer again.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbols, and performs the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening designation command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If it is not received, a game end determination is made to determine that the game has ended, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, processing (specifically, execution of the specific effect E) due to timeout of the winning number determination timer is limited. Thereby, the specific effect E is not executed in a period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to detection of a time-out when the winning number determination timer times out (specifically, the timer value becomes zero). (Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. When the update of the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped, the production control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the big winning mouth prize command. Then, the update of the winning number determination timer is restarted.

  In other words, the winning number determination timer is updated during a period in which the player is playing a game (no end of game is determined), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing a game. The time-out occurs (the time-out control CPU 90120 detects the time-out). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

  In the above-described production form, whether or not the player is playing a game may be determined based on whether or not a game ball is being launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the game ball entrance in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects a game ball. It may be. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game, depending on whether or not the hitting operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the launching motor included in the hitting ball launching device is operating). Good.

  Thus, even if the player is playing a game, the specific effect E is executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30 minute game period) is less than the predetermined number. Thus, it is notified that the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning in the general winning opening is low, and can use it as a reference (for example, judgment material for selecting a base) when playing the game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 where the specific effect E is executed (or the execution frequency of the specific effect E is high), the game nails are made so that the frequency of winning the general winning a prize becomes higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance.

  In addition, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of prizes received in the general prize opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is temporarily stopped (the effect control CPU 90120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer) By doing so, the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning award for a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the game is not performed by the player. In this case, the specific effect is produced at a lower rate than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is being performed by the player. E may be executed.

[45th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless of this, the specific effect E is executed, but the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the forty-fifth production mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) determined that the number of wins to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%. (2) In the case of the probability changing state or the short-time state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. As described above, the specific effect E may be executed at a different rate according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th effect form]
In the 43rd effect form and the 44th effect form, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time Regardless of this, the specific effect E is executed in the common mode. However, the specific effect E may be varied depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th performance mode, the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number However, (1) When it is in the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output). The program is executed in two modes (image display only).

  Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is informed to the image display device 905 along with an image display notification indicating that the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. This is a mode in which notification is performed by sound output for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second mode of the specific effect E is a mode in which only notification by image display is performed and notification by sound output is not performed.

  Note that the gaming state at the timing (the timing when the non-winning determination timer has timed out, the timing when the winning number determination timer has timed out) determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number is (1 ) In the normal state, for example, the specific performance E is executed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and (2) when the probability change state or the short-time state The specific effect E may be executed in the first mode at a rate of 20%, for example (executed in the second mode at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable that the specific effect E in a different mode is executed in accordance with the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings in the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modification of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is the display setting table of FIG. 49, similar to the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. The execution can be switched according to the above. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), and the display setting is set by player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 in the setting screen of FIG. 50). It is only possible to execute. As described above, whether or not the specific effect E is executed can reflect the intention of the game hall or the player.

  For example, when it is not desired to execute the specific effect E on the game hall side, the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting by switching the display changeover switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position). . By having such a configuration, whether or not to execute the specific performance E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning a prize in the general winning opening is reflected with priority given to the intention of the game hall side. Can be made.

  In addition, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form, and the value of the winning number counter area, which are stored in the RAM 90122, are both electric. If it is not backed up at the time of disconnection and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect form and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect form are both invalid. The timer value is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect form becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed.

  In this way, with the stop of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when power supply is resumed, addition starts from 0 again. become. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires providing backup means at the time of power interruption.

  As in the 45th effect form and the 46th effect form, the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the category for differentiating the effect mode of the specific effect E is either (1) whether the gaming state is a normal state or (2 ) It is not limited to whether the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state. For example, the classification may be (1) the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, or (2) the number of reserved memories is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change or (2) a period before the reach state is established in the reach change. Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. Good. Furthermore, according to the difference of these divisions, you may make it both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the aspect of the specific effect E differ.

  It should be noted that the specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not only in such a form, among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, only a specific general winning opening is targeted, and the predetermined number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when there are fewer. For example, only the second general winning port 9050B and the third general winning port 9050C, which have higher game ball winning frequencies than the first general winning port 9050A and the fourth general winning port 9050D, are targeted for the general winning port during a predetermined game period. The number of winnings may be counted, and the specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of winnings is less than a predetermined number.

  Further, in the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form, the specific effect E is executed when the number of wins to the general winning opening within a certain time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of executions of the special figure game. For example, the variable display related to the special figure game may be executed 100 times. The period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period defined by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). In addition, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is performed by left-handed), a probability change state or a time reduction It may be a period controlled by the state (a period in which a game is played with a right hand).

  Further, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening during a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning in the general winning opening with respect to a predetermined number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is smaller than the predetermined number. During driving of the launch motor provided in the hitting ball launching device, approximately 100 game balls are launched into the game area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, the specific effect E may be executed when the number of winnings in the general winning opening with respect to 1000 shot balls (corresponding to a game period of 10 minutes) is less than a predetermined number. . In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is calculated, and the specific effect E is executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. May be.

  Also, the ratio of the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot into the game area 9010 is different depending on whether the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio or not less than a predetermined ratio. A specific effect may be executed. For example, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is low, the character A appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is low. When the level is informed and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot in the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio, the character B appears. Then, it is notified that the winning frequency at the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the winning number to the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot in the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, it may be notified that the character C appears and the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) You may make it determine whether the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning to a general winning opening in a predetermined period is smaller than a predetermined number. For example, when 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won at the general prize opening, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the general prize opening in the game period of 30 minutes The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less than 30 (3 wins). In addition, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening for a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1000 shots) shot in the game area 9010 is less than the predetermined number. The ratio of the number of prize balls that are paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening with respect to the number of shots shot in the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. If it is lower than the ratio, the specific effect E may be executed. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning to the general prize opening with respect to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is lower than a predetermined ratio, or more than a predetermined ratio It may be made to perform the specific production of a different mode by the case where it is.

  In this way, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general winning opening is less than a predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in a case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on a general winning opening where game balls have been won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winning in the general winning opening is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to a predetermined number of winning in the starting winning opening (for example, 100), The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the general prize opening with respect to a predetermined number of winning balls (eg, 10,000) paid out in accordance with the winning in the start winning opening is more than the predetermined number. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number is less, and the prize balls that are paid out in accordance with the winnings in the general prize opening with respect to the number of prize balls that are paid out in accordance with the winnings in the starting prize opening A specific effect E may be executed when a ratio of numbers is calculated and the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In addition, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the starting prize slot is lower than a predetermined percentage. And it may be made to perform the specific production of a different mode by the case where it is beyond a predetermined ratio.

  In addition, for example, the total number of winning balls for a predetermined period when the gaming state is in the normal state (in accordance with the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning at the starting winning opening and the winning at the general winning opening) The total number of award balls paid out) is calculated as a percentage of the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize winning in the general winning opening, and the percentage is lower than the predetermined percentage. The specific effect E may be executed. Moreover, you may make it perform the specific production of a different aspect according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening for a predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the gaming machine is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than a predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, twice for 4 yen, 8 for 1 yen, etc.) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen, 1 yen, etc.) of the game media used in the gaming machine. Etc.) or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, specific effects in different modes are executed depending on whether the percentage of the number of winnings in the general prize opening with respect to the amount of money consumed in the gaming machine is lower than a predetermined ratio or more than a predetermined ratio You may make it do.

[47th effect form]
In the 47th effect form shown in FIG. 75, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening, and the first start winning opening is displayed within the period during which the character is displayed. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first start winning port when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning port is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second start winning port Based on the occurrence of one of the effective start winnings of the ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second starting winning port is less than the upper limit value) In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold change effect is executed to change the display portion corresponding to the variable display game held including the variable display game based on the generated effective start winning from the normal mode to the special mode. .

  It is to be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 holds the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning in a special manner from the beginning without going through the normal manner based on the occurrence of the effective starting winning. You may make it perform change production. For example, when a new effective start winning occurs, the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start winning in accordance with the action that the displayed character swings up the wand etc. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of displaying the hold information, a special mode of hold information corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally established exists).

  Here, in the 47th effect form, and in the 48th effect form and the 49th effect form, which will be described later, each time the game ball wins any one of the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port, the random number circuit 90124. The random number for character determination is extracted from. Based on the extracted character determination random number, the character determination table in FIG. 73 indicates whether or not to make the character appear, and which of the characters A to C when the character appears. Determine at the indicated rate.

  Note that the character determination random number may be extracted by the effect control CPU 90120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state. . In addition, it is possible to prevent characters from appearing after the reach state is established by not extracting the random numbers for character determination after the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed.

  In the example of FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 10% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general prize opening 9050A. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 30%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 60%. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general prize opening 9050B, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 50%, and character A appears at a rate of 35%. It is determined that the character B appears at a rate of 10%, and the character C is determined to appear at a rate of 5%.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 decides that no character appears at a rate of 90% when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the third general prize opening 9050C, and 10% The character C is determined to appear at a ratio. Also, when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating a prize to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 75%, and a character C appears at a rate of 25%. Decide to let

  That is, in this example, when a game ball wins one of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A, the third gaming area 9010B provided in the right gaming area 9010B. Characters appear at a higher rate than when the game ball wins at either the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the player fires a game ball in the left game area 9010A when the game state is the normal state, and the game ball is fired in the right game area 9010B when the game state is the probable state or the short time state, Characters appear at a higher rate than the state or the short time state.

  In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) is based on the fact that a predetermined condition (effective start winning, reach state) is established in the period during which the character is displayed. , The specific effect G (the change result notice effect by dialogue) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probability change state or the short-time state Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

  In this way, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous compared to the probability variation state and the short time state, and the player's game, for example, the state of low interest in variable display of the special figure game is low. By making the execution frequency high, the interest is improved. On the other hand, the probability variation state and the short time state are advantageous compared to the normal state, and the player's game, for example, the state of high interest in variable display of special figure games is high. However, if it remains high, it may be detrimental. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 73, and even when a game ball has won a prize in the same general winning opening, the rate of appearance of characters may differ depending on the game state. When a game ball is won at the second general prize opening 9050B, a character appears at a rate of 50%. However, when a game ball is won at the second general prize opening 9050B in the probability variation state and the short-time state, 10%. Characters may appear at a rate of.

  Further, the character may appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probability variation state and the short time state. Thus, in order to “make the execution rate of the effect in one state different from the execution rate of the effect in the other state”, the effect can be executed only in one state and the effect is not executed in the other state. Is included. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 73, the appearance ratio of characters in the probability variation state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of characters in the normal state.

  In the example of FIG. 73, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 9050B. Yes. Further, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, characters appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when a game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, the frequency of the game ball winning in the second general prize opening 9050B is higher than in the first general prize opening 9050A, and the right game area 9010B is entered. When a game ball is fired, the frequency at which the game ball wins in the third general winning port 9050C is higher than that in the fourth general winning port 9050D. That is, when a game ball wins a general winning opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win, a character appears at a higher rate than when a game ball wins a general winning slot where a game ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when a game ball is won in a general winning opening where a game ball is easy to win, a higher percentage of characters are played than when a game ball is won in a general winning port where a game ball is difficult to win You may make it appear.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 73, characters that may be displayed when a game ball wins in the first general winning port 9050A and the second general winning port 9050B, which are frequently played in the normal state, are as follows. Although it is the characters A to C, there is a possibility that the game ball is displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D that are frequently played in the probability changing state and the short time state. The character with is only the character C. In the probability variation state and the short time state, which are gaming states that have a higher gaming interest compared to the normal state, the occurrence of a situation in which the character display period elapses without the predetermined condition being met, although the character has appeared, Since it is conceivable to cause a decrease, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 73, and even when a game ball wins the same general winning opening, characters appearing in accordance with the game state may be different. 2 When a game ball is won at the general winning opening 9050B, the characters A to C may be displayed. However, when a game ball wins at the second general winning opening 9050B in the probability variation state and the short time state, the character is displayed. Only C may be displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 73, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probability variation state and the normal state is set to be larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. May be.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905. It is assumed that the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning in the general winning opening. That is, the character can be displayed immediately after the winning in the general winning opening, so that the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred.

  When the character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of display of the character A Character A is erased from the screen at the timing when one minute has elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within one minute from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character A is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to an effect executed as the game progresses). Even when an effective start prize is generated, if the number of variable display games held including the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize is 1, the start condition for the variable display game is satisfied. Since the start condition is satisfied immediately after the hold (hold information is deleted), it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, when the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is equal to or less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start winning is the predetermined number. If the number is greater than (1 in this example), the hold change effect may be executed.

  Further, the character may be deleted when the game state is changed to the big hit game state or when the above-described effect control CPU 90120 determines the game end. Also, the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped is not displayed again after the power supply is resumed. That is, it is assumed that backup processing for displaying the character displayed before power interruption on the image display device 905 again after resuming power supply is not performed.

  In addition, when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed, the reserved character is stored in the hold memory when the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, according to a change in the mode of the displayed object). Both the case where the aspect of the corresponding display part changes and the case where it does not change shall be included. Moreover, the timing at which the specific effect F (holding change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. In the example, the character A is used. However, in the specific effect F (holding change effect), the character B may appear or the character C may appear). This is the timing at which the action effect for covering the corresponding display part is performed for a certain period of time (a predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

  In addition, the execution of the specific effect G (change result notice effect) means that as shown in FIGS. 77 (f) and 77 (g), the character 903100 that has appeared (in this example, the character B is the specific effect G). In (variation result notice effect), when character A appears or character C may appear), it means that a predetermined dialogue is issued, and the timing at which specific effect G (variation result notice effect) ends is This is the timing when the dialogue of the character is displayed for a certain period of time (a predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

  When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of the display of the character B Character B is erased from the screen at the timing when two minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within two minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character B is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  When the character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) when the predetermined condition (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) is not established within 3 minutes from the start of display, the display of the character C is started. Character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have elapsed, and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition ), The character C is erased from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is completed.

  As described above, based on the fact that the game ball is won at the general winning opening, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905, so that the player is in a state after the game ball has won the general winning opening. Can be recognized. In addition, the period during which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the character is not executed, the player recognizes that the specific effect is executed if the predetermined condition is satisfied while the character is displayed, and plays the game to satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, the interest of the game is enhanced until a specific performance is executed.

  Further, since the display period differs depending on the character to be displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is being displayed. The player who has confirmed the character type can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period during which the predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. Thereby, the interest until a specific effect is performed can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character according to the general winning opening, that is, the setting ratio of the specific period in which the predetermined condition must be satisfied is different, so that the player has a game ball in any general winning opening. You will be interested in winning.

(Specific example of specific effect F (holding change effect))
In the forty-seventh effect form shown in FIG. 75, when an effective start winning is generated in a state where any of characters A to C is displayed on image display device 905, the character displayed as specific effect F is displayed. The hold change effect with the action is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit, and the second That is, winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening occurs when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

  The effect control CPU 90120 has received a start winning port designation command for specifying “first start winning port” or “second start winning port”, and a start winning determination result specifying command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the effective start winning. FIG. 76 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form.

  In FIG. 76 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and the stored information is reserved. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display part (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first. Is displayed in the normal mode, and the display part (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition second is displayed in the normal mode.

  At this time, it is assumed that the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to cause the character A to appear at a rate of 35% based on the winning of the game ball in the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 73). In FIG. 76B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903000 (character A) having a wand 903001 on the image display device 905. It is assumed that the character A appears on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  Then, it is assumed that an effective start winning is made to the first start winning opening within one minute from the appearance of the character A, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 76 (c), accordingly, the number of reserved memories becomes 3, and the display part (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game that satisfies the start condition third is displayed in the normal mode. The production control CPU 90120 that detects the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, changes whether the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Each is determined.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 has each start prize determination result designation command (not blank data) stored in the start prize command storage area for the first special figure and the start prize command storage area for the second special figure. (Contains valid data). As shown in FIG. 76 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “big hit”, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is determined that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning determination result designation command for designating “out of”, it is decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate of 90% Thus, it is determined that the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode.

  In this example, regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game in which the first and second start conditions are satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed in the normal mode. Only with respect to the start prize determination result designation command corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied for the third time, the display part mode corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Suppose that it is decided to make it happen (with pending change).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), the effect control CPU 90120 directs the tip of the cane 903001 to the start winning memory display area 905H by the character 903000 (character A) and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001. The action effect of the aspect that the display site | part corresponding to each holding | maintenance memory | storage is enclosed by is performed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode to the normal mode based on the determination described above for the second display part from the left end and the left with the execution of the action effect. For the third display part from the left without changing, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the determination described above. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period, the character 903000 (character A) having the cane 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001 are erased from the screen.

  As a result of the change in the display portion mode accompanying the action effect, the player will see the third display portion from the left as a result of the action of the character 903000 (character A) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. Is changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and the variable display game executed three times after the currently executed variable display game is expected.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (d), regarding the start winning determination result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games for which the start condition is not satisfied, all of the display part modes corresponding to the command are normally set. If it is decided not to change the mode (no change in hold), after the action effect shown in FIG. 76 (e) is performed, three hold memories are stored as shown in FIG. 76 (g). None of the three corresponding reserved sites remain in the normal mode.

  Thus, the effective start winning is generated during the character display period by executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) triggered by the fact that “the effective start winning has occurred within the period during which the character is displayed”. Whether or not the game ball is won at the general winning opening until the specific effect is executed can be enhanced. In addition, a game ball is placed at the general prize opening by an effect configuration in which a display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established is triggered by an event of winning a prize at the general prize opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize until a specific performance is executed.

  Also, according to the action of the character 903000 (character A), of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been established, the display form of any display part changes from the normal form to the special form. If not, and if it changes, it can be noted which display mode of the display part changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, it is possible to improve interest by suggesting a variable display game that a player can expect.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character A) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game in which the start condition is not satisfied (action of character A) are common objects ( By being constituted by the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The common object suggests the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied, thereby relating to the appearance and action of the character. It can increase the player's interest.

  The specific effect F (holding change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to an effective start prize (an effective start prize that has been determined to satisfy a predetermined condition) as an opportunity to execute the hold change effect. Lastly, the display results are announced for each variable display game that is held, including the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the hold change effect is executed. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game where the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (the effective start prize determined that the predetermined condition was established) The display result may be notified in advance. On the other hand, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize that triggered the execution of the on-hold change effect (the effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was met) (the last start condition) The display result may be notified in advance by targeting a variable display game (except for the variable display game in which is established).

(Character deletion process)
Similarly to the specific effects A to D, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (holding change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins history (at least the first general prize opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A to the first) in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F. (1) One or more winning histories to the general winning opening 9050D and one or more winning histories to either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 75). Reset condition).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased by the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F is associated with this). (Including the one or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) are deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 75).

  FIG. 78A is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that a decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is being executed, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D at the timing (1). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (2) after one minute has passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. However, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. Yes. If an effective start prize is generated within one minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (3) after 2 minutes from the appearance without generating an effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 is ended and the variable display 2 is started. Further, the variable display 2 is ended and the variable display 3 is started. However, the variable display 1 is ended, the variable display 2 is started, and the variable display 2 is started. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not displayed but is continuously displayed. If an effective start winning is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the action effect ends.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without generating an effective start winning. In this example, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden because the effective start winning is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. At the timing (5) when the production ends, the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories changes from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 is finished and the variable display 2 is started, the variable display 2 is finished and the variable display 3 is started, and the variable display 3 is finished and the variable display 4 is started. With the end of display 1 and the start of variable display 2, the end of variable display 2 and the start of variable display 3, and the end of variable display 3 and the start of variable display 4, character C is not hidden. It is displayed continuously.

  As described above, once the character is displayed, it is continuously displayed until “a predetermined condition is satisfied” or “a predetermined period of time elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”. ing. Then, the character is not displayed at the earlier timing of “the predetermined condition is satisfied” and “the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied”.

[48th form]
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 75, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed. Based on the display result of the variable display game being executed (variable display game with a variation pattern with a reach state) is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as in the 47th effect form, but the predetermined condition to be established within the character display period and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (change result notice effect))
In the forty-eighth effect form shown in FIG. 75, when the reach state is established in a state where any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905, the character displayed as the specific effect G is displayed. The change result notice effect accompanied by the dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display game with the reach state is being executed, and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state has reached a predetermined reach state establishment timing, the fact that the reach state has been established The specific effect G can be executed if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 77 shows a specific example of the change result notice effect in the 48th effect form.

  In FIG. 77 (a), decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 determines to cause the character B to appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that a game ball has won the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 73). In FIG. 77 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character 903100 (character B) having a staff 903101 on the image display device 905. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general winning.

  In FIG. 77 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbols that has been executed ends and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a finalized decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses with “2” on the left, “1” on the right, and “3” on the middle is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  It is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 77 (e), with the establishment of the reach state, a character 3050 of “reach!” Is displayed at the top of the screen. The production control CPU 90120 that detects the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the line of the character B.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the decorative display variable display game being executed is determined to be the big hit combination or the lost combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command or a deviation variation pattern designation command. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot combination, the character of the character displaying the “chance!” Line at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed horizontally, and it is determined to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display game is a combination of lost, it is determined to display the line “chance!” Next to the displayed character at a rate of 90%. % Will be displayed next to the character being displayed at the rate of%.

  In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line “Intense heat !!” next to the character being displayed. On the basis of this determination, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 effects that the character 903100 (character B) swings up the wand 903101 and emits the dialogue 903102 “burning!”. Is executed. When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period, the character 903100 (character B) having the wand 903101 and the dialogue 903102 emitted from the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

  As a result, for the player, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol that will be the jackpot combination will be finally stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect due to the dialogue of the character 903100 (character B) that has appeared based on the winning in the general winning opening. You can grasp that it is expensive.

  In this way, whether or not the reach state is established in the character display period by executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) triggered by “the reach state is established within the period during which the character is displayed”. It is possible to make it interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest until a specific effect is executed after a game ball is won in the general winning opening. In addition, in the event of a prize-winning event at a general prize opening not related to the progress of the variable display game, a play structure for notifying the display result of a variable display game for which a display result has not been derived and displayed has been announced. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the winning of the ball until the specific performance is executed. In addition, attention can be paid to the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A), and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

  In addition, an effect that suggests winning in the general prize opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display game whose display result is not derived and displayed (the line of character B) are common objects. By being constituted by (Character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest until the specific effect is executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening. Then, a common object suggests a winning to a general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game and a display result of the variable display game that is not fixed, so that the player's appearance and dialogue regarding the appearance of the character and dialogue Increase interest.

  In the forty-eighth effect form, the specific effect G in which the character emits a predetermined line is executed when the reach state is established, that is, when the decorative symbol variable display is in a predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the specific effect G may be executed in response to execution of variable display of decorative symbols regardless of the mode of variable display of decorative symbols. Further, for example, when a predetermined notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. The specific effect G may be executed as follows.

  Moreover, in the 48th effect form, the example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening regardless of the decorative display variable display mode has been described. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening becomes a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball is won at the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed at the time of reaching the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is being executed).

(Character deletion process)
As with the specific effects A to D and the specific effects F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the displayed character from the screen, and at the same time, wins history (at least the first general prize opening 9050A to the first general winning opening 9050A to the first game) corresponding to the specific effect G. 4 is included (including a history of one or more winnings to the general winning opening 9050D) (winning history reset condition in FIG. 75).

  In addition, when the displayed character is erased with the elapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is associated with this). (Including the one or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) are deleted (winning history reset condition in FIG. 75).

  FIG. 78 (B) is a timing chart showing the display period of each character when the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the decorative display variable display game is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. Of these, the reach effect is executed only on the variable display 4 and the reach state is reached. Is assumed to hold. When the variable display 1 is being executed, one of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won one of the general winning ports 9050A to 9050D at the timing of (11). The

  When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is not displayed at the timing of (12) when one minute has elapsed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not displayed but is continuously displayed. When the reach state is established within one minute from the appearance of character A, character A is not displayed after the end of the line display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is not displayed at the timing of (13) when two minutes have passed since the appearance without establishment of the reach state. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, and the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is continuously displayed instead of being hidden. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is not displayed after the end of the dialogue display effect.

  When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is not displayed at the timing when 5 minutes have passed since the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden because the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed since the appearance of the character C. During this time, the character C is not displayed as the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

[49th effect form]
In the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a specific type of character is displayed, a specific type of specific effect may be executed.

  For example, in the forty-ninth effect form shown in FIG. 75, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed based on the fact that an effective start winning is generated during the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Thus, even if an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed. Further, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state has been established within the period during which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within a certain period, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed.

  Thus, according to the type of character to be displayed, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect, and the predetermined condition The types of specific effects executed based on the establishment may be different.

  In addition, although the predetermined condition for enabling execution of the specific effect is common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific that is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character The type of effect may be different. For example, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is not executed). However, when an effective start winning is generated during the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (change result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed). May be.

  Moreover, although the predetermined conditions for enabling execution of a specific effect differ depending on the type of character displayed, it is executed when a predetermined condition corresponding to each is established regardless of the type of character displayed. The types of specific effects may be common. For example, when an effective start prize is generated during the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, the specific effect F is specified) However, when the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed (assuming that an effective start prize is generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. After the execution, the character is deleted. (2) When the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning, the character being displayed is executed after executing the specific effect G (change result notice effect) in which the character is displayed. It may be deleted. As described above, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and the predetermined condition previously satisfied among the plurality of predetermined conditions is set. You may make it perform the specific production of the corresponding classification.

  In addition, if an effective start winning occurs before the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action is displayed. The character is deleted after being executed, and (2) the character is deleted after executing the specific effect F (holding change effect) in which the displayed character performs an action even when the reach state is established prior to the effective start winning. You may make it do. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) may be satisfied within the display period of one character, and a specific effect is produced when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied. You may make it perform.

[Modification of 47th Production Mode to 49th Production Mode]
In the example of FIG. 74, when a specific effect is executed within a predetermined period determined after the character is displayed and the specific effect is executed, the character is erased before the end of the specific period. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the specific period ends even after the specific effect is executed. Good.

  In such a form, a specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within a period during which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on a winning in the general winning opening, the character C continues without disappearing from the screen for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if an effective start winning occurs. The specific effect F (holding change effect) may be executed every time an effective start winning is generated for 5 minutes.

  In the example of FIG. 74, the example in which the character display period is a predetermined period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described. However, the display period of the character is not limited to such a form. The period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times or the period until the variable display game being executed when the character is displayed may be ended, and the character is displayed. It is good also as a period until the game state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state or a time-short state, a big hit game state) ends.

  Further, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the display period. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is established and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

  In addition, the character display period may be determined before the character type to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the character display period is one minute, two minutes, or three minutes, and is determined. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If the character B is selected at a rate of 70%, the character A is selected at a rate of 15%, the character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, different display periods may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won or depending on the game state.

  In addition, the predetermined condition to be satisfied in order to enable execution of the specific performance is not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning or reach state, but the occurrence of a big hit gaming state, a predetermined type of big hit gaming state (for example, probability variation big hit, or The number of rounds with the greatest number of rounds), the number of winning balls awarded in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive big hit gaming states (the number of consecutive = the winning state after the end of the big hit gaming state or time reduction The number of consecutive big hit gaming states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit gaming state, the predetermined gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) has been controlled, and the display result is a lost combination A variable display game has been repeated a predetermined number of times, a variable display game having a variation pattern of “non-reach” (“unreach without reach”) has been continued a predetermined number of times, Such that the number reaches a predetermined number, other conditions, that may be a condition satisfied with the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period in which the special symbol variable display is being executed, but the special symbol variable display (the effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display) such as the period controlled in the big hit gaming state is executed. It may be performed during a period that is not performed.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b) described above, depending on whether there is a big hit hold or not, an audio-only effect is performed or an effect by the sound and the movable accessory 901000 is performed. It may be a pre-reading notice effect with a different ratio of whether or not, or may be a chance eye notice effect as shown in a 50th effect form or a 51st effect form to be described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display count until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice.

  In the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form, after the character is displayed based on the fact that the game ball has been won in the general winning opening, the displayed character is the mode of the hold information by the occurrence of the effective start winning. Although the example of executing the hold change effect for changing the game is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game with a big hit display result or a variable display game with a reach state, it will be at a higher rate than when it does not exist A character may appear. In addition, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the rate at which a specific character appears may be higher than when there is no reach. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state and a case in which there is no reach. Then, when an effective start winning occurs after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character performs a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

  In the 47th to 49th effect forms, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the displayed character is erased, and during the period when the jackpot game state is controlled, the game ball is placed in the general winning opening. Even if a prize is won, a specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, in-round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state so as not to disturb these various effects. be able to.

  In the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, the example in which the specific effect is always executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the character display period has been described. Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is performed at the rate of 50%. When the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%, for example, the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the displayed character. The execution ratio may be varied.

  Here, in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening when the character is displayed, the display of a new character based on winning in the general winning opening is as follows. It is assumed that the already displayed character is continuously displayed without performing the above. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence / absence of the character display and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 73 on condition that no character is displayed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The character is displayed based on the determination.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a character is displayed when a game ball wins in the general winning opening, instead of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (already displayed The character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is compared with the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize, and the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is If the display period of the character based on the subsequent general prize is longer, it is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (already The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the subsequent general winning may be displayed.

  In such a form, when displaying a character based on the subsequent general winning instead of the character based on the previous general winning (deleting the already displayed character), the character display period based on the subsequent general winning In addition, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed may be added (the period during which both are added is taken as the display period of the newly displayed character).

  In addition, in the 47th to 49th presentation forms, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening during the character display period, no new character is displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. The remaining display period of characters that have already been displayed may be extended. Here, the period to be extended (the time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if character A is displayed) defined for the already displayed character. Further, even when a winning in the general winning opening occurs during the character display period, one of the characters is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 73, and the determined character (however, a new display is performed). The display period (for example, 2 minutes for character B) according to the character that is not displayed may be added to the remaining display period of the already displayed character.

(Display of multiple characters)
In addition, when a character is displayed when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the character is displayed along with the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without deleting the already displayed character). The character based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, when it is determined that a game ball is won at the general winning opening when the character A is displayed and the character B is newly displayed, a new character is added in addition to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

  In such a form, a period obtained by adding the character display period based on the subsequent general prize to the remaining character display period based on the previous general prize is set as a common display period for both characters. May be. In this case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed, and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, when a common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are erased.

  In addition, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, first, a first predetermined condition (for example, effective When the start prize is established and the first specific effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed, the first character is deleted and only the second character is present. Next, the second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is established, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is established. When the notice effect) is executed, the second character may be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be the same type of character.

  In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be set as a common condition (for example, occurrence of an effective start prize). In this case, both the first character and the second character are The first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a one-time effective start prize) in the state displayed on the image display device 905. Both the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are deleted.

  Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, the specific effect F (holding change effect)), and in that case, both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is established in the state displayed in 905, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (holding change effect)) is executed, and the first When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then a second predetermined condition (for example, reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, a specific effect (specific effect F ( The second character may be deleted by executing the hold change effect)).

  Further, as in the 49th effect form, if the first character (character A or B) is being displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of an effective start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed in accordance with the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) during the period in which the second character (character C) is displayed. In this case, it is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed simultaneously). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, if the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character. It is assumed that it is displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is determined to display the second character based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is deleted and the second character is deleted. Is newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control for displaying the first character is not performed instead.

  On the other hand, when the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are the change result notice effect of the same variable display game and reach) In the case where it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect is executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect is not executed.

[50th effect form]
In the 50th effect form shown in FIG. 79, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 80, etc.), and the displayed button icon 904000 is displayed. Depending on the number, the types of specific effects that can be executed are different. Here, each of the specific effects in the effect form is an effect that prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can notify the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's action. As specific effects, three types of cut-in notice effects (specific effects H), pseudo-continuous notice effects (specific effects I), and chance eye notice effects (specific effects J) are provided.

  The display information condition in FIG. 79 is the display number of button icons 904000 necessary for executing each specific effect. If at least the number of button icons 904000 indicated in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific information is displayed. Production is not executed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. If three or more button icons 904000 are not displayed, the button icon 904000 is not executed.

  The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 is incremented by 1 every time a game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 905. It shall be. When the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the display number of the button icon 904000 required for the execution of the specific effect from the display number of the button icon 904000 before the specific effect execution, It will be displayed on the image display device 905 after execution of the specific effect. For example, when (1) a cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed in a state where five button icons 904000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed. The display number of 4000 is 4, and (2) When the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the display number of 4000 of the button icon after the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is three. (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of 4000 displayed button icons after the chance eye notice effect is executed is two.

(Cut-in notice effect)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect in which after the reach state is established, the display result of the variable display pattern of the variable display pattern is notified based on the content of the characters displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 79, the cut-in notice effect is (1) when one or more button icons 904000 are displayed and (2) when a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern with a reach state. A notification is given to perform a predetermined continuous hitting operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing the predetermined continuous hitting operation.

  In addition, when the variable display game is executed in a state where no button icon 904000 is displayed and the variation pattern with the reach state is performed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notification effect is not notified, and the cut-in notification is performed. Production is not executed. Further, in a variable display game with a variable pattern that does not involve a reach state, notification of a continuous hit operation related to a cut-in notice effect is not performed, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is executed, and then the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times, so the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed with the variation pattern to be executed. A specific aspect of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 80 (a), decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It is assumed that the number (the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the first button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 80B, the screen is updated from a state where the button icon 904000 is not displayed to a state where one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, when one or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, a “cut-in” character 904000a indicating that “a cut-in notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable pattern variable display game with a reach state is executed.

  In FIG. 80 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern that has been executed is finished and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a definite decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “2” on the right, and “8” in the middle, is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern with a reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Confirmation is performed based on the variation pattern designation command received from 90100. When the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the leftmost display region is not displayed.

  In the reach change pattern variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect of displaying the characters 904080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 80 (f), in the center of the screen, the characters “continuous hit!”, A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 9030 are simulated in order from the top. The continuous hit suggestion information 904100 composed of an image and a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be continuously performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases one button icon 904000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes 0, and the “cut-in” character 904000a is erased from the screen when there is no specific effect that can be executed.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 continuously performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time after displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decreased by 1 stage every 1 second from the display. As shown in FIG. 80 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 operates the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 level out of 5 levels (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and a cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

  Specifically, the production control CPU 90120, when the continuous hit suggestion condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 80 (h), when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination Decides to display the characters “chance!” At a rate of 20% and “burnt!” At a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a losing combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is determined that the characters “chance!” Are displayed at a rate of 80% and the characters “burning!” Are displayed at a rate of 20%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect for causing the image display device 905 to display a screen including the determined character. In the example of FIG. 80 (i), the characters 904200 of “Burning !!” are displayed large on the entire screen.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 “chance!” If the operation button 9030 has not been operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. In addition, it is assumed that neither of the characters “Furious heat !!” is displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-continuous notice effect)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if multiple times in a variable display game, by performing re-variation that scrolls and temporarily displays the temporarily stopped decorative symbols again and again. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display of decorative symbols is continuously executed. When re-variation is performed, in accordance with the player's each symbol stop operation, the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C has a pseudo-continuous symbol as a decorative symbol (in this example, composed of characters “NEXT”). Shall be temporarily suspended.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the pseudo-announcement effect is as follows: (1) In a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more. In such a case, a notification is given to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute it by performing each predetermined symbol stop operation.

  Further, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within a period in which one variable display game is executed. It is required to execute a variable display game with a variation pattern that requires a certain operation time and has a variation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific aspect of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.

  In FIG. 81 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. .

  In addition, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen. A “cut-in” character 904000a indicating that the in-notification effect can be executed is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the second button icon 904000 on the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 81 (b), the screen is updated from a state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to a state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen in total, a “pseudo-ream” character 904000b indicating that “pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after a predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more. is there.

  In FIG. 81 (c), it is assumed that after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a fixed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses in which “5” on the left, “1” on the right, and “7” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the change time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the change pattern specification command. And when the variation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state. Decides to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform no re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach variation pattern with a reach state, it is determined to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol (perform re-variation) with a probability of 100%.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stops the decorative symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player, and Then, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R is determined, and the pseudo continuous symbol is determined to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C.

  As described above, when receiving the change start command, the variable display result notification command, and the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the change pattern designation command and also displays the variable display result. A confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the notification command is determined. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R according to the player's respective symbol stopping operations are determined It may be different from the “left” and “right” decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol), or may be the same.

  When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “right” decorative symbol display in accordance with each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 905R and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C, the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols that constitute the determined confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are respectively oscillated and stopped. Decide on. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is determined that the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is rocked and stopped according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, as shown in FIG. 81 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, Accordingly, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 81 (f), a character “Press!”, A downward arrow, and an operation button 9030 are sequentially displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L. Operation suggestion information 904050 composed of a simulated image is displayed. Accordingly, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L.

  Also, the effect control CPU 90120 erases two button icons 904000 necessary for executing the pseudo-announcement effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. As a result, the number of button icons 904000 displayed becomes zero, and the “cut-in” character 904000a and the “pseudo-continuous” character 904000b are erased from the screen in accordance with the fact that there is no executable specific effect.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030, as shown in FIG. 81 (g), the “left” decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The swing stop is a state in which the decorative symbols are not scrolled in the vertical direction but are not completely stopped and are shaking (the state where the final stop is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be rocked and stopped is the “left” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbol that has been determined in advance if the pseudo continuous symbol has been determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “left” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “left” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays operation suggestion information 904050 in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R as shown in FIG. 81 (g). . Accordingly, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R.

  When the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030, as shown in FIG. 81 (h), the “right” decorative display The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped from swinging in the symbol display area 905R. Here, the decorative symbol to be stopped is the “right” decorative symbol that constitutes the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance when the pseudo continuous symbol is determined to be stopped. When it is determined not to stop the continuous symbols, it is a “right” decorative symbol that constitutes a predetermined combination of finalized decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

  When the “right” decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C as shown in FIG. 81 (h). . Accordingly, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C.

  It is assumed that the player who has recognized the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 81 (d), as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 905C, the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the characters “NEXT” is stopped. As a result, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (j), after a temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbols change in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” (for example, Re-variation is resumed to resume the vertical scroll display. After the re-variation, the combination of the finalized symbols (final stop symbols) is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbols based on the table of FIG. 81 (d), as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 905C, the “medium” decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) determined in advance is stopped. As a result, the predetermined combination of “left”, “right”, and “medium” determined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is rocked and stopped. As shown in FIG. 82 (l), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined.

  It should be noted that the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbols even when the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In this case, it is assumed that the combination of the temporary stop symbols determined in advance is temporarily stopped and re-variation is executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, even if no operation is performed, the temporary stop symbol combination is automatically displayed temporarily and the re-variation is executed. And

  In this example, when the operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a variation pattern having a variation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern has a reach state (that is, irrespective of the specified variation pattern effect mode). The operation suggesting condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variation pattern with a reach state. In the case of such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game with the reach state is a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is lost. It is good to.

  Also, if the presence or absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In a case where the pseudo continuous symbol is designated to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 displays two or more button icons 904000 and is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo continuous symbol. The operation suggestion condition may be that a variable pattern designation command is received (a variable display game is executed with a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous notice effect), as in the example described above. , Two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and at a predetermined time Or the variable display game variation time are performed, may be operated suggest condition that.

(Chance eye notice effect)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the prefetch notice. By displaying the chance that is the display result as a final stop display, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

  In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols are finally stopped and displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and “left” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R. In addition, the “left”, “middle”, and “intermediate” symbols, which are the chances, are displayed in the final stop display of even-numbered decorative symbols that are one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C. The “right” decorative symbol combination shall be completed.

  That is, the combination of the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” that are chances in this example is any one of “112”, “334”, “556”, and “778”. In accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is possible to display the final stop combination of decorative symbol combinations that will become opportunities.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the chance eye notice effect is (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and its variable When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is in a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes possible to execute by doing.

  In the chance eye notice effect, the combination of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 9030 only once in one variable display game. Stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation three times to stop swinging each of the “left”, “right”, and “middle” decorative symbols in one variable display game, The operation (all symbols stop operation) required in one variable display game is only once. A specific aspect of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.

  In FIG. 83 (a), the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored in the reserved memory. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning storage display area 905H, each display part (left end, second from the left, and 3 from the left) corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. )) Are displayed in the normal mode.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the start winning change pattern determination result designation command stored in the first special drawing start winning command storage area and the second special drawing start winning command storage area. The change pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display part at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition among the three variable display games that are put on hold is confirmed after confirming the start winning change pattern determination result designation command. Is the non-reach variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) that satisfies the second start condition is the non-reach variation pattern, and the third start condition is satisfied It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach variation pattern.

  Two button icons 904000 are displayed on the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. "Cut-in" character 904000a indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied" and "the pseudo continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is established" A “pseudo-ream” character 904000b is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the third button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 83 (b), the screen is updated from the state where the two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state where the three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, as a total of three or more button icons 904000 are displayed on the screen, a “chance eye” character 904000c indicating that “the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied” is displayed. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion conditions here are (1) a state in which three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, (2) a variable display game with a reach state is put on hold, and the variable display game None of the variable display games executed before the time is accompanied by the reach state.

  In FIG. 83 (c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. In this case, as a confirmed decorative pattern, a combination of non-reach loses with “5” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “6” on the middle is derived and displayed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game in which the start condition is established is not accompanied by the reach state based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Among the two variable display games that are put on hold, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the display portion at the left end) that first satisfies the start condition is a non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (the second display part from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggesting condition of the chance eye notice effect is established.

  When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the variable display game executed before the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern (two times including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). Each variable display game) is requested to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether or not the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach variation pattern is a big hit combination or a loss combination, a start winning determination result designation command or a start winning variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game Check based on the judgment result specification command.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (d), when the display result of the variable display game with the reach reach variation pattern held is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (miss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, in the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% in accordance with the player's all symbols stop operation, Decide to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

  When it is determined to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 90120 constitutes the chance symbol according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display area 905L. And the odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 905C and the even number of decorative symbols to be stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R.

  When it is determined not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the player's all symbol stop operation by displaying the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C. In addition, the decorative symbols constituting the determined decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are swung in the decorative symbol display area 905R of “right”. Decide to stop. In other words, in accordance with the player's all symbol stop operation, it is determined that the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is a non-chance, is rocked and stopped.

  Thus, when the presence or absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 83 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" Are displayed large in the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of an arrow and an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. To do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the above-described pseudo-announce notice effect, all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, The decorative symbols are stopped at 905C and 905R.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays three buttons necessary for executing the chance eye notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 in accordance with the display of the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!”. The icon 904000 is deleted. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and there is no specific effect that can be executed. Accordingly, “cut-in” character 904000a, “pseudo-continuous” character 904000b, and “chance” The character 904000c is deleted from the screen.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!” Performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to stop the non-chance eyes based on the table of FIG. 83 (d), as shown in FIG. 83 (g), “left”, In the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a combination of a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is shaken. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (h), after a predetermined period of swaying stop, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. In this case, as a non-chance eye definitive decorative symbol, a combination of non-reach loses, “4” on the left, “9” on the middle, and “7” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is the player. When it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to all the symbol stop operations, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command This combination shall be rocked and stopped.

  Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the next variable display game start condition for the next variable display game is based on the fact that it is determined that the player is requested to stop all symbols. Even if established, whether or not to stop the chance eye is determined as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 84 (i), when the display result of the variable display game of the reach reach variation pattern that is put on hold is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. According to the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 75%, and stop the non-chance eye at a rate of 25%. In the variable display game where the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance chance at a rate of 25% according to the player's all symbol stop operation, and the non-chance rate at a rate of 75%. Decide to stop.

  Further, as in the previous variable display game, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a player's all symbol stop operation when it is determined to stop the chance eye or when it is determined to stop the non-chance eye. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped is determined according to the above.

  Thus, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol for performing the chance eye stop are determined, as shown in FIG. 84 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Accordingly, there is one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is in a non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 84 (k), characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” are displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. To do.

  Next, it is assumed that the player who has recognized the characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” of “Stop all symbols!” Performs an operation of pressing the operation button 9030.

  At this time, if the CPU 90120 for effect control has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 84 (i), as shown in FIG. 84 (l), “left”, “ The combination of the decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eye is stopped in the middle and right decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (m), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, finalized decorative symbols (final stop) The combination of symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the decorative symbol variable display game is determined. Here, as the determined decorative pattern of the chance, a combination of non-reach loses, “1” on the left, “1” in the middle, and “2” on the right, is derived and displayed.

  If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is the player. Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to all the symbols stop operation of, the fixed decorative pattern (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command The combination of symbols) shall be stopped.

  Next, it is determined that the effect control CPU 90120 requests the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye notice effect. Therefore, when the next variable display game start condition is satisfied, whether or not to stop the chance eye is not determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and accordingly, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. No longer exists, and the display portion at the left end is in a non-display mode.

  In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the characters 904080 of “reach!” When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG.

  In the 50th effect form described above, the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect are all in the state after the game ball has won the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000 is displayed. In the displayed state, it can be executed with the player's operation corresponding to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on the condition of the player's operation after winning the game ball to the general winning opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

  In addition, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that has won.

  Further, when the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is established in a state where one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is given as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. If the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is established in the state of being displayed, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is given, and three or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition for the notice effect is established, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations as an operation corresponding to the chance eye notice effect is given, and the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. I can understand.

  Further, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “cut-in” character 904000a is displayed, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo-continuous” character 904000b is displayed. When the number is 3 or more, the character 904000c of “chance” is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of specific effect that can be executed according to the number of button icons 904000 displayed. Thereby, interest can be given to the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening.

  In addition, you may make it alert | report the operation required in order to perform the specific effect with the kind of specific effect which can be performed. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, a “continuous hit” character is displayed next to the “cut-in” character 904000a, and when the display number is 2 or more, a “pseudo continuous” character is displayed. A character “stop each symbol” is displayed next to the character 904000b, and when the number of displays is three or more, a character “stop all symbols” is displayed next to the character 904000c of “chance eye”. It is possible to grasp an operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the variable display game start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a reach state, and the variation time of the variation pattern is 8 In this case, there is a notification (display of continuous hitting suggestion information 904100) for prompting a continuous hitting operation for executing the cut-in notice effect, and a prompting operation for stopping each symbol for the pseudo consecutive notice effect execution. Which of notifications (display of operation suggestion information 904050 in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) should be a problem. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the button icon 904000 having the larger number required for execution of the specific effect is executed with priority. Accordingly, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (two or more button icons 904000 are required) is a notification that prompts a continuous operation for execution of the cut-in notice effect (one or more button icons 904000 is required). Shall be given priority over.

  In the state where three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and In some cases, the variable display game on hold has a reach variation pattern. In this case, a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) Either display of operation suggestion information 904050) or notification prompting all symbols stop operation for execution of the chance eye notice effect (characters 904200 of “Stop all symbols!” And display of operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game) The question is whether to do this. In this case, a notification that prompts all symbol stop operations for the chance eye notice effect execution (three or more button icons 904000 are required) is a notification that prompts each symbol stop operation for the pseudo continuous notice effect execution (button icon 904000). Is given priority over 2).

  In this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 904000 is the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect (1 for a cut-in notice effect, 2 for a pseudo-continuous notice effect) If the number is more than 3), the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required for execution of the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 initially displayed is the specific notice effect. It will continue to be displayed after the performance.

  For example, when the chance eye notice effect is executed in a state where four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, one button icon 904000 that is continuously displayed remains after the chance eye notice effect is executed. The “cut-in” character 904000a remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started, the operation suggesting condition of the cut-in notice effect is established, and the notification for prompting the continuous hitting operation is performed.

  In this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is established (the number of button icons 904000 is confirmed). In addition, this is not limited to such a form, but when the variable display game is being executed, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect established? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the production control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the repetitive hit suggestion information 904100 for causing repeated hits is displayed. You may make it display. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result derivation display) reaches a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If it is determined and displayed, the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the production control CPU 90120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start winning occurs, and the variable display game If none of the variable display games executed before the reach state is associated with the reach state, it is determined whether or not three or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbols are stopped. The characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” for “stop all symbols!” May be displayed. That is, within the variable display game that is being executed when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification to the effect that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed is a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In the case of the reach variation pattern, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for performing the continuous hit may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (display result display) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If the time is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (display result display) is the predetermined time (for example, You may make it display the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation at the timing which became 10 seconds of remaining. In addition, the CPU 90120 for effect control controls the variable display game with the reach state (the variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Variable display game with a reach state by determining whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is accompanied by a reach state. Is held, and all the variable display games executed before the variable display game are not accompanied by the reach state, the entire symbol stop operation is performed in the variable display game being executed. The characters 904200 and “operation suggestion information 904050” for “stop all symbols!” May be displayed. That is, within the variable display game that is being executed when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number (without waiting for the start condition of the next variable display game to be executed) A notification to the effect that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

  Also, in the 50th effect form, the operation suggestion conditions for informing to perform a predetermined operation (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stopping operation, all symbol stopping operation) are all conditions relating to the variable display game (display mode and The example in which the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display game because the predetermined operation is performed has been described. However, the operation suggesting condition is not limited to such a form, for example, the jackpot It may be a condition related to a gaming state (for example, whether or not the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state, whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is greater than a predetermined number). The specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the gaming state. For example, when the number of display of the button icon 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player is notified to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. In some cases, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a probable variation jackpot, or whether or not the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is greater than a predetermined number. In addition, when the number of display of the button icon 904000 reaches a predetermined number within a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state (however, it is set as the production mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the probability changing state) A notification that prompts the player to perform a predetermined operation may be performed, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect may be executed to notify whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state.

  Further, in the 50th effect form, even when the number of display of the button icon 904000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. If the number of displayed button icons 904000 is not less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), notification for prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example, There is no notification prompting any one of the repeated operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operations), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the chance eye notice effect) May not be executed).

(Example of single announcement)
In the 50th effect form, in order to stop the temporary stop symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three operations are performed for each area, but the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) ) May be caused to be performed three times for each area in order to stop each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is rocked and stopped in response to the operation of, and then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R, and the final stop in accordance with the operation of the operation button 9030 The right symbol constituting the symbol is stopped from swinging, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 905C, and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol according to the operation of the operation button 9030 May be rocked and stopped. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols is the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, “left”, “right”, and “middle” are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative design at 905C, the player's expectation for the operation can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas, a combination of special ornament symbols different from a combination of normal ornament symbols (for example, images of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”) is used. By stopping, the player is informed of a predetermined operation, and whether the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or out (or a probability change big hit) according to the player's predetermined operation. Or a specific effect that informs whether or not it is a non-probable big hit or the like) may be executed. For example, the special decorative symbols, which are images simulating the operation buttons 9030, are stopped in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas (or the normal ornaments are displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas, respectively. The symbol is stopped), and the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Is stopped in the “medium” symbol display area. Then, when the player who has recognized the image of the characters “continuous hit!” Performs a continuous hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the characters “big hit!” Or “losing” is displayed on the image display device 905. May be displayed.

  Further, in such a form, according to the character image stopped in the “medium” symbol display area (according to the notification mode that suggests performing a predetermined operation), the variable display game The rate at which the display result is a big hit (or the rate at which the probability variation big hit) may be different. For example, in the “middle” symbol display area, the operation button 9030 is made longer than when the image of the character “continuous hit!” Indicating that the operation button 9030 should be repeatedly pressed many times is stopped as a special symbol. The rate at which the display result is a big hit may be higher when the image of the character “Long press!” Suggesting that the user press the button once is stopped as a special symbol. In this way, an effect in which the display result of the variable display game is notified in accordance with the player's operation without passing through the reach state may be executed as the specific effect. During the period in which one variable display game is being executed, the special decorative design is stopped by causing the combination of the special decorative symbols to be stopped a plurality of times in the “left”, “right”, and “middle” symbol display areas. Each time the combination is stopped, the player may perform a predetermined operation. In this case, a notice effect that suggests a display result is executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified in accordance with the last predetermined operation. .

  In the 50th effect form, each symbol stop operation is valid on condition that two or more winnings are made to the general winning opening, and further, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stopping operation, An example is shown in which all symbol stop operations are valid on condition that three or more winnings are made, and a chance eye notice effect is executed in response to all symbol stop operations, but a notification that a predetermined operation should be performed (predetermined The condition that the operation is valid) may be based on four or more winnings to the general winning opening.

[51st effect form]
In the 51st effect form shown in FIG. 79, the specific effect that can be executed according to the gaming state is different from the 50th effect form. In the 51st effect form, the cut-in notice effect requiring continuous hitting operation can be executed when the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-short state. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the gaming state is in the normal state, and the chance eye notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. It can be executed only when

  In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, an operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, a pseudo-continuous notice effect that requires a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. Therefore, each symbol stop operation is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the executable game state is different between the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the chance eye notice effect, the operation suggesting condition is not satisfied at the same time.

  Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the chance eye notice effect is not executed in the normal state, so that “cut-in” characters 904000a and “pseudo-continuous” are displayed. The character 904000b is displayed, but the “chance” character 904000c is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probability change state or the time reduction state is three or more, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed in the probability change state or the time reduction state. Although the characters 904000a and 904000c of “chance” are displayed, the characters “pseudo-continuous” 904000b are not displayed.

  Thus, according to the gaming state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening, the type of the specific effect that is notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed is different, so that it is appropriately determined according to the gaming state. It becomes possible to make interest different.

  In this production form, a notice production that requires a larger number of button icons 904000 is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Priority may be given to execution. For example, when an operation suggestion condition for a cut-in notice effect and an operation suggestion condition for a pseudo-continuous notice effect are established for the same variable display game, a notice effect with a higher percentage of big hits (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) ) Should be executed with priority.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect form shown in FIG. 85, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each winning prize, and in the case of displaying, the “cut-in” character 904000a, the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b, and the “chance eye” character 904000c. Which of these is to be displayed is determined. FIG. 86 (A) shows whether or not to display any of characters 904000a to 904000c in accordance with winning in each general winning opening, and if to display any of characters 904000a to 904000c. The display information determination table for determining is shown.

  When the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A, the performance control CPU 90120 determines to display the characters “cut-in” 904000a on the screen at a rate of 25%, and at a rate of 75%, It is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 50%, and the “cut-in” character 904000a at a rate of 25%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display “pseudo-continuous” characters 904000b at a rate of 25%.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is determined that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the “cut-in” character 904000a is set at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be displayed on the screen, and it is determined to display “90% of chance” characters 904000c on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball wins in the fourth general winning opening 9050D, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of “cut-in” is set at a rate of 10%. It is decided to be displayed on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of “chance eyes” on the screen at a rate of 20%.

  Similarly to the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started in a state where the character “cut-in” 904000a is displayed, the repeated hitting operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed in response to a continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game with a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started in a state where the characters “pseudo-continuous” 904000b are displayed. In such a case, it is notified that each symbol stop operation is performed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in accordance with each symbol stop operation, and the reach fluctuation pattern is changed in a state where the character 904000c of “chance eyes” is displayed. If the display game is on hold and all the variable display games executed before that are non-reachable variation patterns, all symbols will be stopped. Notification to, to run the chance eyes announcement attraction in response to all the symbol stop operation.

  In the example of FIG. 86 (A), when a game ball is won at the first general winning opening 9050A, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the gaming ball is displayed at the second general winning opening 9050B. When winning, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and when a game ball wins the third general winning port 9050C, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball is won in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

  In this way, depending on the general winning award that the game ball has won, the ratio of the notification of the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio that the specific effect can be executed differ, so that It is possible to improve interest by focusing on whether a game ball enters.

  Also, the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is easier to win the second general prize opening 9050B than the first general prize opening 9050A, and the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B is the fourth general prize opening. If it is configured so that it is easier to win the third general winning opening 9050C than 9050D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A in the normal state, if the probability change state or the short time state) When a game ball wins the fourth general winning opening 9050D), the ratio of executing a specific effect is high.

  Further, when a game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, either the “cut-in” character 904000a or the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b may be displayed. However, the “90th chance” character 904000c is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball has won a prize in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, there is a possibility that either a “cut-in” character 904000a or a “chance eye” character 904000c is displayed. However, the “pseudo-ream” character 904000b is not displayed.

  In this way, depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different, so that the game ball enters any of the general winning ports. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, a gaming ball is fired in the left gaming area 9010A, and when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the short-time state, the gaming ball is fired in the right gaming area 9010B. In a normal state in which a game ball wins in 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, characters 904000a to 904000c are more likely than a certain change state or a short time state in which a gaming ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Is displayed at a high rate, and the execution rate of the specific effect is high.

  Since the interest is likely to decrease when the gaming state is the normal state, the interest reduction is prevented by increasing the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific performance is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, the player's interest is directed to the special game or the ordinary game. Therefore, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are set lower than the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately change the interest of a game ball to win a general winning opening according to the game state.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 86 (A), when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, the ratio and specific effects in which characters 904000a to 904000c appear are executed more than in the normal state. The ratio may be increased. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 86 (A), when a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning is obtained. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball is won in the mouth 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. In FIG. 86 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only at the time of winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C. Or you may make it provide the specific effect which can be performed only at the time of winning to the 4th general winning opening 9050D.

  In addition to the example shown in FIG. 86 (A), as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a game ball won at each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the game state at the time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear or the rate at which the specific performance is executed is greater than the case where the game state when the game ball is won is a certain change state or a short time state. May be made higher. In contrast to the example shown in FIG. 86 (B), when a game ball is won at each general prize opening in the probability variation state or in a short time state, when a game ball is won at each general prize opening in the normal state. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate. In FIG. 86 (B), a specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state. May be provided.

  In addition, according to whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability change state or a time-short state, not only an example in which the rate at which characters 904000a to 904000c are displayed or the rate at which a specific effect is executed is different, For example, whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number, the number of consecutive jackpot gaming states (the number of consecutive = the end of the jackpot gaming state) Whether the number of consecutive big hit gaming states that are controlled to be probabilistic or short-running state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, whether or not a variable display game whose display result is a lost combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, Depending on other conditions, such as whether or not the variable display game of the variation pattern of “reach” (“losing without reach”) has continued for a predetermined number of times, whether the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, etc. It may be made different proportions percentage or specific effect that 904000a~904000c is displayed is executed.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of an image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is (Y + 1) pixels. The coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the display screen are (0, 0), and the coordinates of the pixel at the lower right corner of the display screen are (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1, 0) And a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices is defined as a second area β. There is no overlapping area between the first area α and the second area β. In this example, the second area β is a larger area than the first area α.

  In the first area α, prizes related to the number of prizes received at each prize opening, such as the number of prizes received at the general prize opening, the number of prizes received at the first start prize opening, and the number of prizes received at the second start prize opening, etc. Number information can be displayed. In the second area β, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), an error message display area 5E, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, and a start winning memory display area 905H. Is provided. 87 and 88, the background image can be visually recognized in the second area β, but the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

  In this example, the entire background image stored in the ROM 90121 as effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels, as shown in FIGS. In this image, the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [rectangular area defined with coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is visible to the player. Of the entire background image area, the area corresponding to the first area α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) is invisible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is not visible.

  In the example of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), in the first area α, (1) “the number of general winnings today” that is the total number of winnings to the general winning opening on that day. (2) “Today's navel winning number” which is the total number of winnings at the first starting prize opening on that day, and (3) “Today's total number of winnings at the second starting winning prize opening” Three items of “Den-chu winning number” are displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 wins a game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D when a winning in the general winning opening occurs. When a general prize opening designation command is received to specify whether the game ball is won at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening when a winning at the starting prize opening occurs, the starting prize is designated. A mouth designation command is received. Accordingly, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually count the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) “Today's general prize number” is 70, (2) “Today's navel prize number” is 521, and (3) “Today's electronic Chu prize number” is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of prizes received at the general prize opening and the number of prizes received at the start prize opening in a comparable manner, it is possible to relatively grasp the winning situation at each prize opening.

  In the example of FIGS. 87B and 88E, in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one special figure game hold. The image of the fourth symbol during variable display, the image of the decorative symbol during variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

  The fourth symbol display layer, the decorative symbol display layer, and the hold information display layer are all higher than the background image display layer. Here, when the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image, when a certain image and another image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the visibility of a certain image is reduced. This means that display control is given priority over the performance. Specifically, in the example of FIGS. 87 (b) (c) and 88 (e) (f), an area where each image of the 4th design, the decorative design, and the hold information is displayed and one of the background images. In this case, with respect to the overlapping area, the 4th pattern, the decorative pattern, and the hold information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easily visible (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (player side).

  In this embodiment, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 88 (f), the area where the decorative design is displayed overlaps with the area where the error message is displayed. In this case, the overlapping area is displayed. With regard to, the display control is performed so that an error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easily visible (including visible), and the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize (including invisible). Accordingly, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative design (player side).

  As a display control for enabling the player to visually recognize only the area corresponding to the second area β among the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire background image is displayed in the background. An area corresponding to the first area α in the entire background image area is not set in the background image display layer (that is, [coordinate (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, (Rectangular area defined with Y) as the apex] may be used).

  In addition, as another display control for enabling only the area corresponding to the second area β of the entire area of the background image to be visible to the player, the entire area of the background image is set as the display layer of the background image (that is, In the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image, the entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices) is used. By setting another background image (for example, a white, plain image) for winning number information in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. It may be. In such a configuration, it is easy to see a predetermined transmittance (an image of a display layer below the display layer) on another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for winning number information. , It becomes invisible at 0%), so that the image of the lower display layer may be visible. By setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer An area corresponding to the first area α can be visually recognized, and the character E can be visually recognized.

  In addition, the display layer of the winning information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning information is not reduced by displaying other information in the first area α. In addition, the display layer of the number-of-wins information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer for the number-of-wins information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in a display area for other information (whether it is displayed in the first area α or the second area β). Regardless, the visibility may not be lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (b), since the variable display of the 4th symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to the general winning opening (“the number of general winnings of the day”) as the winning number information displayed in the first area α, the first start winnings. The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth ("Today's navel winning number") and the number of winnings to the second start winning opening ("Today's electric Chu winnings") are not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

  Then, in the image display device 905, when the 4th symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display, and the hold information display are performed, when a winning in the general winning a prize occurs, FIG. As shown in d), based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the general winning award designation command, the number of winnings in the general winning award displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings today”). Is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are performed, the general winning displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without impeding visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result that the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  When the special symbol variable display ends and the display result is stopped, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is ended and the display result is stopped, as shown in FIG. 87 (c). At the same time, the variable display of decorative symbols is also terminated and the display result is stopped. In this example, it is assumed that the 4th symbol display area 905A remains lit (displayed) in a display color that reminds of dislocation (the display result is stopped and displayed). In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the off symbol that is “5, 3, 1” is stopped and displayed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the fourth symbol is displayed in a stopped state (in a state where the display result is derived and displayed) and is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 905. Information on the number of prizes received at the general prize opening ("Today's number of general prizes"), the number of prizes at the first start prize opening ("Number of navel prizes of today"), and the prize at the second start prize opening Visibility of the number ("Dai Chu Chu winnings today") is not hindered. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number-of-wins information appropriately irrespective of the stop display of a 4th symbol, and the stop display of a decoration symbol.

  In the image display device 905, when the 4th symbol stop display and the decorative symbol stop display are performed, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. 87 (d). Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 has received the general prize opening designation command, the number of winning prizes to the general prize opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general prizes for today”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, the number of winnings in the general winning slot displayed in the first area α is calculated. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the visibility when the winning information is updated is not hindered by the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result that the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 87 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening is shown as being updated without impeding visibility. In the same way as in the case of the general winning opening, the winning in the first starting winning opening is performed regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. The number is updated without impeding visibility. In addition, even when a winning to the second start winning a prize occurs, as in the case of the general winning a prize, regardless of the variable display and stop display of the fourth symbol, and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, The number of winnings in the second start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, “an error has occurred” is displayed on the image display device 905. Is displayed). As described above, the error message display layer is higher than the decorative symbol display layer. Therefore, when the decoration control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command when the decorative design is variably displayed or when the decorative design is stopped, an area for displaying the decorative design and an error are displayed. With respect to the overlapping range with the area where the message is displayed, display control is performed to make the error message easy to see (including visible) and make the decorative symbol difficult to view (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 88 (f), when viewed from the player, the error message is closer to the player (the player side) than the decorative symbol that is variably displayed (or the decorative symbol that is stopped). Looks like it is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the fact that the error message is displayed on the image display device 905 indicates that the error message is displayed in the first area α. As the number-of-wins information displayed on the screen, the number of winnings in the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening ("Today's navel winning number"), The visibility of the number of winnings at the 2 start winning award (“Today's electric Chu winnings”) is not hindered. Thereby, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

  When the image display device 905 displays an error message and a winning is made to the general winning opening, as shown in FIG. 88 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the general winning. Based on the receipt of the mouth designation command, the number of wins to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“the number of general winnings of the day”) is updated. As described above, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs while the error message is displayed, the visibility of the number of winning in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered. Updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when winning information is updated is not hindered. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the winning in the general winning opening has occurred and as a result that the number of winning in the general winning opening has been updated.

  In the example of FIGS. 88 (f) and 88 (g), the number of prizes received at the general prize opening is shown as being updated without impeding visibility. Even when it occurs, the number of winnings to the first start winning opening is updated without impeding visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. In addition, even when a prize is awarded to the second starting prize opening, the visibility of the number of winnings to the second starting prize opening is hindered regardless of the display of an error message, as in the case of the general winning prize opening. Updated without any changes.

  In the example of FIG. 88 (f), the characters “An error has occurred” is displayed to simply notify that an abnormality has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality designated by the abnormality detection designation command. For example, when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, the message “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed, and an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Sometimes “Vibration error has occurred” may be displayed, and when an abnormality detection designation command is received that specifies that a radio wave abnormality has occurred, the message “Radio error has occurred.” May be displayed. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 87A, a rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices is defined as a first area α, and coordinates (a + 1) are defined. , 0) and a rectangular area defined with coordinates (X, Y) as vertices are defined as the second area β, but the first area in which the winning information can be displayed, the decorative design, the fourth design, and the hold The second area in which information and error messages can be displayed is not limited to a rectangular area, but may be any area that does not overlap each other on the screen.

(Display / Hide setting for winning information)
As described with reference to FIG. 49, the glass door frame 903a is opened and operated (the clerk of the game hall can operate but the player cannot operate). Position) and the player's setting screen (see FIG. 50) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning a prize by the player's operation. The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings is to be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88 is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed in this way, and when the setting for displaying the winning number information is performed. In the first area α, not only the number of prizes received in the general prize opening, but also the number of prizes received in the first starting prize opening (so-called “heso”) and the second starting prize opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number is also displayed. That is, according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first start winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 49, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to non-display (first position), the number-of-winning information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed by the operation button 9030. In addition, the number-of-wins information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 regardless of whether or not the setting for displaying the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is performed. Do not show. Even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to display setting (second position), the setting for displaying the winning information is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of non-display setting). ) Is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 89 (b) and 89 (c) are display modes of the screen in a state in which the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed as described above, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is performed. In this case, in the first area α, the number of winnings for the general winning opening is not displayed, the number of winnings for the first starting winning opening (so-called “heso”) and the second starting winning opening (so-called “Den Chu”). The number of winnings is not displayed.

  In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display winning information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side. In addition, the number-of-wins information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) (b) (c), the error message display area 5E, when the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made, compared to the setting for displaying the winning number information. The fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, and the start winning memory display area 905H are common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are set to display the winning number information and the winning number. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change for setting whether or not to display the winning information.

  On the other hand, when it is set not to display the winning number information, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a), (b), and (c), it is set to display the winning number information (display examples in FIGS. 87 and 88). In contrast, the background image is visible in the first area α and the second area β. 89 (a), (b), and (c), the first area of the entire background image [rectangular region defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) as vertices). An area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices) and an area corresponding to the second area β [coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X, Y) as vertices, that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

  Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 89 (a), (b), and (c), the player determines that the character included in the rectangular area defined by using the coordinates (a + 1, 0) and coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. In addition to being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in the rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0, 0) and coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices can also be visually recognized.

  Thus, regarding the display position and display range (size of the image) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. The control load is reduced by not changing (common) with the setting that does not, while the other images (background images) can be viewed with the setting that displays the winning information and the setting that does not display the winning information By making different ranges different, the interest in the case where winning information is not displayed is improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the image display device 905, when the 4th symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display, and the hold information display are performed, a prize is awarded to the general winning a prize opening. In the case where the occurrence occurs, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), since the number-of-winning information is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the image display device 905 performs the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol, a case where a winning in the general winning opening occurs. As shown in FIG. 89 (d), since the number-of-winning information is not displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed.

  In the example of FIGS. 89 (b), (c), and (d), an example is shown in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning in the general winning opening occurs. In the case where the setting is not displayed, the number of winnings at the first starting winning opening is not displayed even when winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, and the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this manner, whether or not to display the number of winnings at each winning opening can be set according to the player's operation.

(Each item in the winning information)
FIG. 90 shows an example of items of winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. FIG. 90 shows all items related to the number of winnings in the general winning award. Similarly to this, items related to the number of winnings in the first starting award and the second starting award are shown. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

  It is possible to display “today's number of general winnings (A1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and increments the value of the general winning number counter by 1 every time a general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general winning ratio (A2)”, which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power-on of the gaming machine. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. By adding one by one, the total number of outs can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs, A2 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “today's general award ball number (referred to as A3)”, which is the total number of award balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening since the power-on of the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to display “today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)”, which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  The ROM 90121 stores the number of winning balls determined for each of the first start winning port, the second starting winning port, the first general winning port 9050A to the fourth general winning port 9050D, and the big winning port. . The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and each time the general winning entry specifying command is received, the general winning entry specifying command is designated. By adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening to the value of the general winning ball number counter, A3 can be tabulated. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the big winning opening. The total number of winning balls can be totaled by adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port specified by each command to the value of the winning ball counter every time a command is received for a large winning port that specifies winning. Thus, A4 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of winning balls.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current gaming state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the gaming state by the gaming state designation command, and wins in the low base state The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be divided and tabulated.

  Specifically, it is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the low base state (referred to as B1)” that is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state It is possible to display “the number of general winnings in the high base state (referred to as C1)”, which is the total value of the number of winnings.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . Then, during the period when the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, B1 is added by incrementing the value of the low base medium general winning number counter by 1 every time the general winning opening designation command is received. During the period when the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command is either the probable change state or the short time state, the value of the high base medium general winning number counter is received every time a general winning mouth designation command is received. By adding one by one, C1 can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display the “low base state general winning ratio (referred to as B2)” that is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state It is possible to display “a general winning ratio in a high base state (C2)”.

  It is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium-out number counter and the value of the high base medium-out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And, in the normal state, the low base medium out number can be counted by adding the value of the low base medium out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received, B2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of low base medium outs. On the other hand, in the probability variation state or the time-short state, the high base medium out number can be counted by adding one to the value of the high base medium out number counter every time a detection signal output from the out sphere detector is received. It is possible to count C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high base medium outs.

  In addition, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the low base state. It is possible to display “the number of general winning balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)”, which is the total value of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in each general winning opening in the state.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And Then, during the period in which the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is the normal state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning mouth designated by the received general winning mouth designation command is displayed as a low base medium general winning ball number counter. B3 (“the number of general prize balls in the low base state”) can be counted by adding to the value of the game state, and the gaming state designated by the received gaming state designation command is either the probability changing state or the short-time state. The period is determined by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening specified by the received general prize designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball counter, so that C3 ("the number of general prize balls in the high base state" ") Can be tabulated.

  In addition, it is possible to display “a ratio of the general prize ball in the low base state (referred to as B4)”, which is a ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, and It is possible to display the “high base state general prize ball ratio (referred to as C4)” which is the ratio of C3.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low base medium prize ball number counter and the value of the high base medium prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. . In the normal state, each time the start winning port designation command, the general winning port designation command, and the large winning mouth prize command are received, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is reduced to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the ball counter, the number of low base medium award balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low base medium award balls, B4 (“low base state General prize ball ratio ") can be tabulated. On the other hand, in the probability change state or the short-time state, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning mouth designated by each command is increased every time the start winning mouth designation command, the general winning mouth designation command, and the large winning prize designation command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball number counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be tabulated, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 (“high It is possible to tabulate the general award ball ratio in the base state.

  As described above, information related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be tabulated for each gaming state, so that the player can grasp information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), focus on the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is the high base state (probability change state or short time state), focus on the items C1 to C4. Become.

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while not displaying the items C1 to C4, and when the gaming state is in the high base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in the first area α, while the items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. In a high base state, the items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner easier to visually recognize (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4.

(Aggregation of winning information during the set period)
Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number-of-wins information in the period set by the player, and is the “total number of winnings in the set period ( D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

  When the total period according to the player's operation shown in FIG. 91 described later is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 and totals. The timer value is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general prize opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the set period, and the general prize is received during the set period when the total timer times out (when the set total period has elapsed). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

  In addition, while the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period since the detection signal was last received from the out-sphere detector), the counting timer is updated while the number of outs is not increasing (for example, After a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection signal was last received from the out ball detector, the counting timer may not be updated and may be stopped. In this manner, a period during which the game ball is not being launched into the game area 9010 may be excluded from the counting period.

  When the counting timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player's The counting timer is set again at the counting period according to the operation). The value of the general winning number counter during the set period is added every time a general winning opening designation command is received, and the general winning number counter during the set period when the counting timer times out again (when the set counting period has elapsed again). Is displayed in the first area α as D1. Thus, D1 corresponding to the counting period is displayed for each counting period set by the player.

  In addition, it is possible to display a “general winning ratio (set as D2) for the set period” which is a ratio of D1 to the number of game machine outs in the set period. When the CPU 90120 for effect control sets the value of the general winning number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, the value of the out number counter during the setting period stored in the RAM 90122 is also set to 0. The number of outs in the set period can be totaled by adding the value of the out number counter during the set period every time a detection signal output from the out-sphere detector is received. D2 can be tabulated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

  Further, it is possible to display “the number of general prize balls in the set period (denoted as D3)”, which is the total value of the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display “general prize ball ratio (D4) in the set period” which is a ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

  When the total period corresponding to the player's operation shown in FIG. 91 described later is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, The value of the total timer is set to a set period (total period according to the player's operation), and the total timer is started. Each time a general winning award designation command is received, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning prize designated by the general winning award designation command is added to the value of the general prize winning number counter during the set period, and the counting timer The value of the general prize ball number counter during the set period when time-out occurs (when the set counting period elapses) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

  When the counting timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball number counter is reset to 0 again during the setting period, and the value of the counting timer is again set to the setting period (player). The counting timer is restarted, and the counting timer starts again. Then, every time a general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period is added, and the general prize ball during the set period when the total timer times out again (when the set total period elapses again). The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. Thus, D3 corresponding to the total period is displayed for each total period set by the player.

  When the value of the general award ball counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 is set to 0, the effect control CPU 90120, together with this, the award ball counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122. Is set to 0, and each time a winning prize designation command is specified, each time a start prize designation command, a general prize designation command, or a big prize entry command specifying a prize to the big prize opening is received. Is added to the value of the prize ball number counter during the set period, so that the number of prize balls in the set period can be tabulated, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period D4 can be tabulated by calculating.

  It should be noted that since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 designates which general winning opening the game ball has won, the effect controlling CPU 90120 has the first general winning opening 9050A to the No. 4 Total number of winnings to the general winning opening 9050D is individually counted, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, and D1 to D4 are counted for each general winning opening, and the total value is calculated. It is possible to display in the first area α.

  Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the items is displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, the items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening Which of the related items is to be displayed in the first area α may be selectable by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030). (For example, an operation using the operation button 9030) may be selectable.

  In addition, each item related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening described later, and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the total value does not reach the reference value, As shown in FIG. 91 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the total value of the item displayed in the first area α has not reached the reference value of the item. . Thereby, the player grasps whether or not the total value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine).

  Next, a method for setting the total period will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the totaling period setting screen in FIG. 91 sets the totaling period when selection is made to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the selection screen in FIG. 50 (2) described above. This is a screen that is displayed when the selection screen for selecting whether or not is selected and the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed) And

  In the setting screen of FIG. 91 (1), a message “Please set the total period” is displayed, and an image simulating the operation button 9030 is displayed below the message. On the setting screen, an icon including the characters “10 minutes”, an icon including the characters “30 minutes”, and an icon including the characters “60 minutes” are displayed, and the button is “determine button after selecting with the jog dial”. A message is displayed, and an arrow that prompts the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating is displayed.

  In the case where the total period is set to 10 minutes, the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the left to depress the operation button 9030 while the icon including the characters “10 minutes” is selected. The message “The period is 10 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. When setting the total period to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 91 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “30 minutes” is selected, FIG. 91 (2) As shown in FIG. 5, a message “Setting period is 30 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. Further, when setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, when the operation button 9030 (jog dial) is rotated to the right and the operation button 9030 is pressed while an icon including the characters “60 minutes” is selected, The message “Setting period is 60 minutes” is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

  Thus, it is possible to set a desired total period according to the player's operation. In the example of FIG. 91, 30 minutes is set as the total period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91 (3), the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as “the number of general winnings in the set period (D1)” in the first area α. In the example of FIG. 91 (3), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is Since it is 37, the total value exceeds the reference value. Accordingly, there is no notification that the total value has not reached the reference value.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 91 (4), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is counted. Since the value is 29, the total value does not reach the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the total value has not reached the reference value (display of a message “below the reference value (30 times / 30 minutes)”) is made.

(Items related to the number of prizes received at the start prize opening)
The effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning port designation command for designating which one of the first start winning port and the second starting winning port is won when a winning to the start winning port occurs. By the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general winning opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general winning openings, the “number of wins to the first starting winning opening of today (in A1 “Equivalent)”, “award ratio to today's first start winning opening (corresponding to A2)”, “the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning to the first start winning opening today (corresponding to A3)”, And “the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on the winning of today's first starting winning opening to the total number of winning balls of today (corresponding to A4)” and “the second starting winning opening of today Winning number (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today ’s second starting prize opening "Rate (equivalent to A2)", "the number of winning balls awarded based on today's second starting winning opening (equivalent to A3)", and "today's total number of winning balls against today's total number of winning balls The ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the 2 start winning opening (corresponding to A4) "can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)”, “the number of winning in the low base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st prize opening (corresponding to B3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the low base condition to the first starting prize opening in the low base state "Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to B4)", "Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in low base state (corresponding to B1)", "Second starting in low base state" Winning ratio to the winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of winning balls awarded based on winning at the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Low base state " In the low base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to B4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Also, “the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)”, “the number of winning in the high base state” The number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the 1st start prize opening (corresponding to C3) "and" the number of prize balls given in the high base state to the first start prize opening in the high base state “Percentage of winning balls awarded based on winning (corresponding to C4)”, “Number of winnings in second starting winning opening in high base state (corresponding to C1)”, “Second starting in high base state “Award ratio to the winning opening (corresponding to C2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C3)”, and “Awarding in the high base state” In a high base state for the number of winning balls 2 ratio of starting prize counts granted under the winning to winning opening (corresponding to C4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  In addition, “the number of winnings in the first start winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D1)”, “the winning ratio in the first starting winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “the first starting winning in the setting period” Awarded based on the number of winning balls awarded based on winning in the mouth (corresponding to D3), and “based on winning in the first start winning mouth in the setting period with respect to the number of winning balls given in the setting period” "Percentage of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D1)", "Winning ratio for the second starting winning opening during the setting period ( D2) ”,“ the number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the second start winning opening during the setting period (corresponding to D3) ”, and“ setting for the number of prize balls given during the setting period ” Awarded based on winning the 2nd starting prize opening during the period Percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

(Indication of roles and ratios)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, each of the winning ports (large winning port, second starting winning port, first starting winning port, first to fourth general winning ports, etc.) is also included in the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011. , Also called “entry area”). Further, in the gaming machine 901, information such as a role combination and a role ratio can be displayed on a display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 provided on the main board 9011.

  As described above, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is normal to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether the game medium has entered the general winning area as frequently as designed. Therefore, in a gaming machine according to an embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in a gaming machine having a general winning area. In the following, display of an accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the display of the total of game balls on the main board 9011 and the ratio of bonuses will be described.

  A main board 9011 shown in FIG. 94 is a board that performs control related to the game. The main board 9011 is enclosed in a board case 90201 as shown in FIG. 96, and a display monitor 9029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of the main board 9011 as shown in FIG. Yes. The display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 9011 is not visible when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front when the main board 9011 is viewed is the back side of the game board 902 when the glass door frame 903a is opened. This is the front of the game machine and is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front when viewing the main board 9011 and the front of the gaming machine 901 may be made common.

  On the main board 9011, information related to game winning, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), the big winning opening ( The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are entered and aggregated, and the display monitor 9029 is a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls to win the large winning opening (attacker). Ratio (%) of the total number of winning balls, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the 2nd starting winning opening (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls to winning the large winning opening (attacker) ) Is displayed. The combination is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive consecutive feature winning balls) obtained by winning a winning game (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is the number of winning balls for winning the winning prize winner (attacker), the number of winning balls for winning the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu), and the winning prize opening (Attacker) and the total number of winning balls by winning in winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the second starting winning port (Den Chu). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. In addition, the winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the big winning port (attacker) and the second starting winning port (Den Chu) are fixed roles, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the number of winning balls (the number of general winning balls), the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) with 6000 winning balls, 2 Special Dengaku Award, which is the number of balls in the regular electric role (number of electric chew awards), which is the number of balls won by winning in the starting winning opening (Denchu), Count the number of balls (the number of attackers). The total is set as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 roles (%) and role ratios (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric roles The number of winning balls (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Furthermore, an equivalent amount (for example, several bytes) of storage of 110000 sets of 60000 pieces is stored, and the cumulative combination (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated.

  The display monitor 9029 switches and displays the 60,000 consecutive games (%), the role ratio (%), and the cumulative role (%) and the role ratio (%) every predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of award balls won by winning at the first starting hole (hews) counted by the progress of the game, winning at the second starting winning hole (electric chew) The number of award balls due to, and the number of award balls due to winning a prize winner (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60,000 consecutive games (%) is reflected in the 60000 hand ratios (%) displayed thereafter, 60,000 are displayed. There may be a discrepancy between the combination (%) and the ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the large winning opening (attacker), the total number of winning balls If the numbers are input and aggregated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 combinations (%)), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning mouth (attacker) A method for calculating the ratio of the winning combinations (ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of acquired winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. For this reason, a combination can be calculated | required by the following (1) Formula. Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Series of players = [Number of consecutive feature winning balls / total number of winnings] × 100 (1)
Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 and rounding down to 3 decimal places after 0.70.
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of a long-term bonus. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down to 00EAh, which is a decimal number, with respect to 00EA60h, which is the total number of prize balls, in order to facilitate calculation on a microcomputer used in a gaming machine. Calculate 234 by notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

  The substrate case 90201 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 9011 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 9011.

  The substrate case 90201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, and the like of the main substrate 9011. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct display on the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged on the first part of the main board 9011 (for example, the central part of the main board 9011), the second different from the first part on the main board 9011. Other electrical components and the like are disposed on the portion (for example, the peripheral portion of the main substrate 9011), and a hole, a heat radiating hole, and a seal are disposed on the portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 9011. Good. In particular, the heat radiation hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 9029 in order to release heat generated by the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is disposed at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the display monitor 9029 does not hinder the visibility, it is easy to confirm information related to winning.

  In addition, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with a portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, the portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main board 9011 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered by the wiring.

  The main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine. In order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display monitor 9029, the main board 9011 is separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them with a gap between them. The other electronic components here are preferably large control components such as a CPU.

  Storage area for storing information related to game winning (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information related to game winning stored in ring buffer having 10 counters of 2 bytes at maximum), prize ball The total number buffer) may be stored continuously without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after being performed. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 90100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. If this is calculated by the above method, it will be 32799/32799 = 100%, and if replaced by the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but the role (%) (or combination (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of 1% error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is counted by the counter, the display of the ratio (%) and the combination (%) is not performed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 9029 displays the combination ratio (%) and combination (%) on 7 segments, and switches and displays each value for every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to %), There is a possibility that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the ratio (%) and the combination (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 95, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

  In addition, in the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted in a counter. It is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided, and the number of winning balls is counted separately based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated may be calculated. Further, based on the detection result, a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game media winning the attacker and the game media winning the electric chew are discharged are joined. Thus, a value to be added to the counter for the number of winning balls for the winning combination and the counter for the number of winning balls for the consecutive winning points may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which it is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided in each of an attacker and an electric chew, and the number of each winning ball is individually counted based on the detection result.

  A display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 in the gaming machine 901 as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 901, the main board 9011 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 46) provided in the gaming machine frame 903, as shown in FIG. In addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, an audio lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided on the back side of the game board 902. ing. The main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral substrate other than the main substrate 9011. Note that the main substrate 9011 may overlap these peripheral substrates. In particular, the main substrate 9011 may overlap so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

  The RAM 90102 on the main board 9011 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the first gate switch 9021A has detected a game ball. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning port switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  In addition, a clear switch is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is disposed on the back side surface of the game board 902 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch, data used for the role combination and role ratio stored in the RAM 90102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when it is necessary to redo the calculation of the association and / or ratio, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the association and / or ratio. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination or ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing data.

  The main substrate 9011 is provided with an RTC 90106. The main board 9011 can detect the current time by the RTC 90106. The RTC 90106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing an initial setting, but in this embodiment, the RTC 90106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main substrate 9011 is housed in a substrate case 90201 as shown in FIG. Caulking pins 9011B are attached to the substrate case 90201. By providing the caulking pins 9011B, the main substrate 9011 is completely enclosed in the substrate case 90201, and illegal acts on the main substrate 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

  The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011. In addition, a seal seal 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 has been enclosed. The seal seal 9011S is pasted, for example, across the part to be removed from the substrate case 90201. The seal seal 9011S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 9011, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is blocked, such as in front of the display monitor 9029. In this way, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal sticker 9011S.

  The display monitor 9029 includes a first display portion 9029A, a second display portion 9029B, a third display portion 9029C, and a fourth display portion 9029D. Each of the first display portion 9029A to the fourth display portion 9029D is composed of seven segments configured by seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots disposed on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display portion 9029A to fourth display portion 9029D can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 96B is displayed on the display monitor 9029. The total period is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D of the lower two digits. In display No1, short-term roles are displayed, and in display No2, short-term role ratios are displayed. In display No3, the total cumulative combination is displayed, and in display No2, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) was 60000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the association and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the association and the ratio is once reset.

  Note that, in the above example, the combination and the ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the winning combination may be the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of prize balls. Also, the winning ratio is the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state of the total winning balls and the winning winning opening in the big hit gaming state. It is good also as a ratio which the number of prize balls by winning a prize occupies.

  When the short-term combination of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and when the short-term combination ratio of the display No2 is displayed, the first “Y7.” Is displayed on the display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. Further, when the short-term combination of the display No. 1 is displayed, the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B display the short-term combination of percentages (% display) and display the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B.

  When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the second display portion 9029B. When the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination of percentages (% display) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D.

  The main board 9011 calculates the number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the combination and ratio. Aggregating. In the main process, the CPU 90103 performs the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general. A state confirmation process for confirming the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning prize switch 9024D is performed.

  In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 9022B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, When the value of the big prize counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general prize opening switch 9024A, the second general prize opening switch 9024B, the third general prize opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D Are a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. By adding the value, it counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the switch status corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch status check process). Thus, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. .

  The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a general winning mouth winning ball (a winning ball by winning from the first general winning mouth to the fourth general winning mouth (sode)), 1st starting prize mouth ball (award ball by winning the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning an electric Chu), special electric role award ball (winning an attacker) Is the number of prize balls. The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of winning balls. Note that the CPU 90103 individually counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are counted. The number of winning game balls to may be summed up. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first start mouth prize ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of the first start mouth prize ball are calculated. May be calculated together.

  The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total total for each winning opening. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 90102 is provided with a role / ratio ratio storage area for storing role ratios and role combinations of 10 sets and totals. The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the ratio and the combination of the 10 sets and the total cumulative based on the number of winning balls based on the number of game balls received in each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative. In addition, it is stored in the combination / ratio ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and combination. Each of the combination sets and the combination ratio storage area for storing the set ratios and combinations of ten sets is composed of a counter of 1 byte at maximum. For example, when the ratios and combinations of 10 sets and the total accumulation are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin of a maximum of 1 byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 90101, RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 98, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 is the ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H is a hexadecimal number. The same applies hereinafter). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to a program management area), and the CPU 90103 reads out data from the ROM 90101 by designating this ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area in the memory space (in this embodiment, FE00H to FEBFH). Write the data.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Also, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 90102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. Has been. In the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the RAM data area, reference data referenced by the control program described above (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  In addition, data used for displaying the combination and role ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of prize balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination-ratio ratio storage area. In addition, the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets) Min) total storage area and 10 sets of combination ratio storage areas. Note that the storage areas of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the non-use areas and the storage areas of the RAM 90102 corresponding to the other areas respectively store data having different head addresses of the subroutines.

  In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  The main board 9011 controls the display monitor 9029 to display the role combination and the role ratio. Here, the main board 9011 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 100A is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, first, the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination of the display No1, the character “y” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A and the character “6.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term combination is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No2, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-2), the letter “y” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the letter “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination of display No3, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-3), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “6.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-4), the character “A” is displayed on the first display portion 9029A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display portion 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display portion 9029C and the fourth display portion 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the third display portion 9029C, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 9029D.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-5), the short-term combination of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the short-term combination of the display No. 1 to the display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Moreover, the display color is set to green only for the short-term combination of the display No1, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the short-term roles, short-term roles ratio, total accumulated roles, and total accumulated roles ratio every 30 seconds.

  Further, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the sum and total of 10 sets is updated, and the storage of the combination / ratio storage area for storing the ratios and combinations of the 10 sets and total is updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 101, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66”, respectively. “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 94 includes a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a. Opening the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 9011 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a.

  The door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 903a in the case of an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, detection of door opening is performed assuming abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 903a and the glass door frame 903a is opened normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 903a. Because there are many, special problems can be prevented.

  Next, the control related to the display of the combination ratio executed on the main board 9011 will be described. In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. For this reason, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the combination and the role ratio stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. The data used for displaying the combination and the role ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. After the initial setting, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. The association / ratio-related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the association / ratio comparison process. In the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 102, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the association / ratio comparison process (step S90101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when a clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S90103). As for the winning information, a game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. Obtained by.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S90104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured by the RTC 90106 and determined. As a result, when the current time is within business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the game ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not (step S90106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls can be appropriately determined as an upper limit per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 90106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

  As a result, when the game ball has not won more than the predetermined number of balls per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of prize balls is added to add the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in step S90103. Processing is performed (step S90107). The award ball number adding process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when warning display preparation is performed, the association / ratio comparison processing is terminated as it is. In the winning ball number addition processing, the general winning opening (sode), general winning opening (heso), ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. Add the number of each prize ball.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), and the special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of prize balls for each of the prize balls is calculated. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not expired (step S90108; NO), the association / ratio comparison processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is up (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by addition in step S90107 is the number of executions for calculation (step S90110). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, for example, a reference for moving numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the first storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number may be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000.

  As a result, if the number of winning balls (the winning ball total) is not the calculated number of executions (step S90110; NO), the association / ratio comparison processing is terminated as it is. If the number of winning balls is the calculated execution number (step S90110; YES), a combination and a combination ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term roles, the short-term roles ratio, the cumulative roles (total cumulative roles), and the cumulative roles (total cumulative roles) are calculated, respectively. For this reason, the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, the role / role ratio display process is performed (step S90112), and the role / role ratio related process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), or if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), in step S90106, an attacker per unit time. If it is determined that more than a predetermined number of game balls have been won (step S90106; YES), error display preparation is performed (step S90113). Thereafter, the association / ratio comparison process is terminated.

  Next, the combination / ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination / ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 103, in the role / role display control process, it is determined whether preparation for role / role display has been completed (step S90201). If it is determined that the combination / ratio display preparation process has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether or not an error display preparation has been completed (step S90202).

  As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (step S90202; YES), an error display is performed (step S90203). Error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when performing error display, a predetermined error display may be performed on another display device such as the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  If error display has been performed, it is determined whether warning display preparation has been completed (step S90204). If it is determined in step S90202 that it is not determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029 and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may be blinked or displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029 in order to indicate that a warning is being given. Alternatively, display may be performed by increasing the display brightness of the display monitor 9029. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays.

  In addition, when a warning is displayed, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device such as the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the warning is displayed, the combination / ratio control process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S90204; NO), the combination / ratio control process is also terminated.

  If it is determined that preparations for displaying the consecutive / ratio ratio have been completed (step S90201; YES), a short-term consecutive display is performed (step S90206). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combination display is started (step S90207). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90207; NO), the process returns to step S90206 and the short-term combination display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90207; YES), the process proceeds to step S90208. In this way, the short-term combination display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

  Subsequently, a short-term role ratio display is performed (step S90208), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term role ratio display is started (step S90209). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90209; NO), the process returns to step S90208, and the short-term role ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90209; YES), the process proceeds to step S90210. Thus, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative combination display is performed (step S90210), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combination display was started (step S90211). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90211; NO), the process returns to step S90210 to continue the cumulative combination display. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90211; YES), the process proceeds to step S90212. Thus, the cumulative combination display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative ratio display is performed (step S90212), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative ratio display was started (step S90213). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90213; NO), the process returns to step S90212 and the cumulative ratio display is continued. Thus, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90213; YES), the combination / ratio control process is terminated.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 displays the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the accumulated combination, and the accumulated combination. The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 for controlling the game so that visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to game nails (fault nails), windmills and the like provided on the game board.

  Further, the display monitor 9029 is disposed on the front surface when the main board 9011 is visually recognized. For this reason, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to the display monitor 9029 is disturbed. Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation holes provided in the board case 90201 are not directly in front. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being difficult to see due to the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

  In addition, the main substrate 9011 is disposed at a position that does not overlap each peripheral substrate other than the main substrate 9011. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being obscured by a peripheral board such as the effect control board 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 can display a role combination and a ratio regarding the relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chew or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing a general winning opening. . The display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as short-term officers and cumulative officers every predetermined period. For this reason, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

  Further, since the display monitor 9029 displays the combination of the prize balls (short-term combination) and the ratio (short-term combination) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, the total number of prize balls becomes 6000, etc. The numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays a combination of a combination combination (short-term combination) and a combination ratio (short-term combination) as well as a combination combination and a combined combination ratio every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term roles or short-term roles ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative roles or cumulative ratio. The display monitor 9029 is provided on the main substrate 9011 accommodated in the caulked substrate case. For this reason, it can contribute to prevention of fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 9029.

  In addition, the gaming machine 901 includes a detecting unit that detects and detects fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. Injustice here includes, for example, counting the number of winning balls outside of business hours, counting the number of winning balls while the door frame is open, and winning a gaming ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 901 operates within the business hours of the amusement hall, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. Further, the gaming machine 901 plays a game with the door frame closed, and counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

  Further, during the game of the gaming machine 901, the game ball cannot be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, game balls are fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. For this reason, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls per minute is approximately 100. Therefore, for example, when a winning of 100 gaming balls per minute or more than 20 gaming balls per 12 seconds is detected, the probability of fraud is extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 901, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 903a is not closed, when a game ball wins more than a predetermined number of balls per unit time for an attacker, Eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress tampering of information on role associations, role ratios, and the like due to these frauds. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

  In the above gaming machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is erased. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from becoming insufficient in capacity.

  The ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area. When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity. Further, it is possible to increase the data that remains without being erased.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, a lack of ring buffer capacity can be prevented.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is deleted in the ring buffer. For this reason, since it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be erased, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity, and it is possible to calculate the linkage and role ratio with a large amount of data.

  When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. . In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described. However, in the storage area for storing data other than the ring buffer, for example, the total accumulation, a part or all of the data is similarly deleted. May be.

  Further, in the above gaming machine 901, the data of the short-term combination, the short-term combination, the cumulative combination, and the cumulative combination are displayed every 30 seconds. For this reason, each data can be compared easily. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the data of the short-term role association, the short-term role ratio, the cumulative role combination, and the cumulative role ratio, or only a part of these data.

  In addition, when displaying each data of the short-term officers, the short-term officers ratio, the cumulative officers-interest, and the cumulative officers-per-cycle, the short-term officers are displayed differently from the other data. Specifically, short-term officers are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term officers.

  In the gaming machine 901, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation when the clear switch is operated. The clear switch is an emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the role combination or the role ratio. When this switch is operated, it is possible to tamper with the data of the role combination and ratio, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the gaming machine 901 can warn of this abnormal operation by a warning display, fraud such as data falsification can be suppressed.

  In the above gaming machine 901, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, and the third general winning port switch 9024C. In addition, based on the number of prize balls obtained on the basis of the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, the combination and the combination ratio are calculated. For example, using a sensor (count switch 9023) provided individually for an attacker and a sensor provided after a discharge passage through which a game medium won by an attacker and a game medium won by an electric chew merge, Based on the detection results, if you calculate the combination and role ratio by counting up the counter for winning the number of winning balls and the counter for winning the number of consecutive winning balls, it is difficult to specify which winning port is the payout. There is a possibility that the calculation of the ratio and the combination will be complicated. In this regard, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, the third general winning port switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning port. By detecting that the game medium has been won by the switch 9024D, and calculating the combination and ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, the number of winning balls is determined based on the winning at each winning opening. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the combination and the ratio, and to calculate with high accuracy.

(Modification regarding display control of winning information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, an item related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a pass gate designation command for designating which gate the game ball has passed through is sent from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the production control board 9012 (production). By transmitting to the control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can count the number of times that the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B and display it in the first area α.

  For example, the number of times the gate has passed today (corresponding to A1), today's gate, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been won Gate pass ratio (corresponding to A2), low base state gate pass count (corresponding to B1), low base state gate pass ratio (corresponding to B2), high base state gate pass count (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio in the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the setting period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the setting period (corresponding to D2) can be totaled and displayed in the first area α. . In addition, these items can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B).

  (2) Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the grand prize winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, so that it can count the number of prizes received at the big prize winning and can win the prize winning prize. The number of awarded prize balls based on the total number can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

  For example, by the same method as the totaling process when receiving a general prize opening designation command for designating which of the first to fourth general prize openings has been awarded, Equivalent) ”,“ Today ’s winning prize ratio (corresponding to A2) ”,“ Today's winning ball award (corresponding to A3) ”,“ Today ’s total “Percentage of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to the number of prize balls (corresponding to A4)”, “Number of winning prizes for the winning prizes during the set period (corresponding to D1)” , “Award ratio to the big prize opening in the setting period (corresponding to D2)”, “Number of winning balls awarded based on the winning in the big winning opening in the setting period (corresponding to D3)”, and “In the setting period Granted based on winning a prize in the winning period during the set period for the number of awarded balls The percentage of winning balls number (corresponding to D4) ", aggregates the can be displayed in the first area alpha.

  Here, “the ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize winnings with respect to today's total prize balls (corresponding to A4)” or “the prize balls awarded during the set period” When the ratio of the number of winning balls awarded based on winning a prize winning in the set period with respect to the number (corresponding to D4) is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), the fact is notified. You may make it do. For example, in the first area α, a message that “the ratio of the winning prize winning ball exceeds the reference value (60%)” may be displayed.

  Also, the number of prize balls given to the total number of winning balls based on winning at the second start winning opening controlled by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 are controlled. When the total ratio with the number of winning balls awarded based on winning a prize winning is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), the fact may be notified. For example, in the first area α, a message such as “the prize winning ball ratio exceeds the reference value (70%)” may be displayed.

  (3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each entry area. Although the example in which the number of game balls entering the respective entry areas is tabulated is described based on the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, each entry area is entered. The number of game balls entered is counted or the effect control CPU 90120 enters a game ball into each entry area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters the game entry area. It is also possible to count the numbers.

  It should be noted that the number of game balls entering the counter area (the counter value corresponding to each switch) counted by the game control microcomputer 90100 or the effect control CPU 90120 on the main board 9011 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 90120. Thus, the image can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, by outputting a command designating the total number of entries into each entry area from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 can enter each entry area based on the command. The number of approaches can be specified and displayed in the first area α.

  It should be noted that the display devices provided on the main board 9011, such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, indicate the number of entries into each entry area counted on the game control microcomputer 90100 side. You may make it display on. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B You may make it alert | report by doing the specific display different from the display result of the variable display of a special symbol. Note that the display device provided on the main board 9011 on which the aggregated results are displayed is not limited to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, or the like, and displays the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for. The display device may have any form such as a lamp, LED, 7 segment, liquid crystal display device, EL panel, light guide plate, and the like.

  The value of each counter (number of entries into each entry area) stored in the RAM 90102 can be determined by, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) stored in the RAM 90102 by the game control microcomputer 90100. Displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B when a reset operation for resetting the flag (according to the gaming state for playing) is performed by the game hall side (for example, a store clerk). Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011. The reset button is provided on the back side (game island side) of the gaming board 902, and the gaming board 902 is rotated forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903 using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 903. By doing so, a reset button provided on the back side of the game board 902 can be operated.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the counting period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described. A counting period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by an operation on the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set counting period Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, you may make it alert | report that.

  (5) In addition, when a winning at a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the fact may be notified to the first area α. For example, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, a message “No general winnings for 10 minutes” may be displayed in the first area α. The predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), or an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). It may be settable by

  (6) It should be noted that the above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine including a sorting device in which the winning ratio to the start winning opening and the general winning opening is a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). The number-of-wins information related to the number of winnings at each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which game balls received by a sorting device are alternately distributed to a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, it is possible to alternately distribute the game balls received by the distribution device to the start winning port and the general winning port. The above embodiment is also applied to the gaming machine having a configuration in which the distribution device distributes the game balls alternately to the start winning opening and the general winning opening. It can be displayed in area α. However, since the number of wins to the general prize opening is automatically determined according to the number of wins to the start prize opening, the ratio of the number of wins to the general prize opening to the number of wins to the start prize opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let them.

  (7) In FIG. 91, the counting period can be set according to the player's operation, but the winning number information is reset according to the player's operation, and the counting of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do it. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winning opening specifying command. Each time it is received, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by one.

  Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed in accordance with the player's operation before the set period elapses. For example, although the aggregation period is initially set to 30 minutes, in order to quickly know the aggregation result, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the aggregation period to 10 minutes. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation results for a longer period, the player performs a resetting operation before the set period elapses and extends the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Also good. Further, the total period once set may be extended according to the player's operation after the set period elapses. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set counting period, has elapsed and the counting results for 10 minutes have been displayed once, the player performs an extension operation to grasp the counting results for a longer counting period, The totaling period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute totaling result and a 60-minute totaling result including 10 minutes may be obtained).

  (8) In the first area α in the demonstration screen displayed on the image display device 905 or in the state where the game is being performed (the state where the game end determination is not made and the demonstration screen is not displayed). The image explaining whether each winning opening provided on the game board surface is the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening may be displayed. In addition, the number of winning balls at each winning opening may be notified.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the game hall setting has priority over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may have priority over the game hall setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. When the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “display” is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 50 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 905, winning information is displayed on the image display device 905. (The display control in FIGS. 87 and 88 is executed), and when the operation button 9030 is pressed in a state where an icon including the characters “do not display” is selected on the selection screen in FIG. It may not be displayed on the device 905 (the display control in FIG. 89 is executed).

  Also, it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information in accordance with the order of the accepted setting operation, with the game hall setting and the player setting being set to the same priority. That is, it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information by giving priority to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3). If set, the winning information is displayed (the display control in FIGS. 87 and 88 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set so that the winning information is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is moved to the second position (display position) after that. In such a case, the winning number information is displayed (display control in FIGS. 87 and 88 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation portion of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the setting for not displaying the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to (3) thereafter. In such a case, the winning information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 89 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) are set to display the winning information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is moved to the first position (non-display position) after that. ) Is not displayed (the display control in FIG. 89 is executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the store clerk of the game hall, and the player operates the operation button 9030. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number-of-wins information on the image display device 905 by operating, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and by operating the display changeover switch 9032, While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIG. 50 (1) to FIG. 50). (A setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the game hall side.

  On the other hand, it is possible to set whether or not the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905 by operating the operation button 9030 by the player (and the store clerk). There may be no means (for example, no display changeover switch 9032 is provided) that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible for the player and the game hall clerk to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). . In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation for the player and the game hall.

  (10) It should be noted that the winning number information related to the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which is set to the display position (second position), and the operation portion of the mode switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, the image display device 905 may not be displayed. That is, it may be handled in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG.

  As described above, the information on the number of winnings received at each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described with reference to FIG. It may be information that can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when it is performed and that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state where a player can play a game (for example, a state where a demo screen is displayed), a state where a game end determination is not performed (a state where a special game is being executed, a general game, etc.) In a state where the game is executed, including a big hit gaming state), etc., is information that is not displayed on the image display device 905, and a demo screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the start of power supply to the gaming machine. Display only before a game is performed), or when an operation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed, it is possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). Good.

  (11) Also, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning mouth (general winning mouth, first starting winning mouth, second starting winning mouth, etc.) described in FIG. 90 and the like is either in the maintenance mode or the game mode In this mode, display on the image display device 905 may be possible. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. The winning number information may be displayed. That is, the display area of the number-of-wins information may be different between a period in which no game is played and a period in which a game may be played.

  Also, in the maintenance mode, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the operation of the game hall or the player or players) Information on the number of winnings of a predetermined main item) may be displayed. In other words, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on the period in which the game is not performed and the period in which the game may be performed.

  (12) In the game mode, during the period in which the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the number-of-wins information can be displayed in the entire first area α and second area β. On the other hand, the number-of-wins information may be displayed only in the first area α during the period in which the game end determination is not performed and the game is determined to be in progress. That is, the display area of the winning information may be made different between a period in which it is determined that no game is being performed and a period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

  In addition, during the period when the demonstration screen is displayed due to the game end determination being performed, the total number of winning information is displayed for all items, whereas the game end determination is not performed and the game is not performed. During the period determined to be medium, the number-of-wins information of some items (items set by the operation of the game hall side or the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. In other words, the items of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that no game is being performed and the period in which it is determined that a game is being performed.

  (13) In the above embodiment, with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, 4th symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning information ( 87 and 88) and the setting for not displaying the number-of-wins information (FIG. 89) are not changed (shared), while the other images (background images) are set to display the number-of-wins information and the number of winnings. The visible range differs depending on the setting for not displaying information. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 92, the setting for displaying winning number information (FIG. 92 (a)) and The display position and display range (image size) of all the images including the background image other than the winning number information may be made common with the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 92B). . Thereby, the control burden by the display / non-display setting of the winning number information can be reduced.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (size of the image) of the decorative symbols are set to display winning number information (FIGS. 87 and 88) and not to display winning number information (FIG. 89). However, the display position and display range of the decorative symbols may be made different according to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 93, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 93A), the setting for not displaying the winning number information than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (FIG. 93 ( The intervals between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display of decorative symbols may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, a decorative symbol display area 905L when the winning information is not displayed is included in the first area α. As described above, when the winning number information is not displayed, variable display or stop display of the decorative symbols in the first area α may be allowed. Thus, you may make it raise interest by performing an effect using the whole screen.

  (15) In the above embodiment, as the gaming machine error, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified, but not limited to these, the gaming machine error includes front door opening abnormality and payout mechanism abnormality. (Abnormal prize ball, etc.), illegal prize winning in the big prize opening (abnormality in which a prize winning is detected even though the big prize opening is not open), or malfunction of various members of the pachinko gaming machine 901 Etc.

[Other variations]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Note that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-described production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms and the following modifications are shown. You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of a game machine which were made.

  In the above embodiment, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the flow direction of the game balls are placed in the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D. It shall be possible to win any one. By adopting such a configuration, even when the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is possible to expect winning from a general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, the game balls that have not passed through the gate 9041B may win a prize in one of the third general winning port 9050C and the fourth general winning port 9050D at a higher rate than the game balls that have passed through the gate 9041B. . By adopting such a configuration, even when the frequency of game balls passing through the gate 9041B is low in the probability variation state or the short time state, it is possible to expect a prize to be awarded to the general prize opening provided on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. Furthermore, a specific production | presentation is performed based on the winning to a general winning opening, and a game entertainment interest can be raised more.

  In the above embodiment, executing a specific effect at a different rate depending on the gaming state includes executing the specific effect only in a certain gaming state, and not executing the specific effect in other gaming states. . Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at a different rate depending on the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect is not executed in other game periods. included.

  In the above embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute the effect only in the first state in order to execute the effect at a higher rate than in the second state different from the first state. In the second state, not including an effect is also included. Here, the classification between the first state and the second state includes the classification according to the number of reserved memories, the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (the special figure game), in addition to the classification according to the gaming state described above. Whether or not variable display is being executed), according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect, or , Whether the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects), a classification according to a specific performance timing (for example, before the reach state is established in the variation pattern with reach effects) Or whether it is before or after execution, or whether it is before or after execution of pseudo-continuous production in a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous production). .

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executable only in any one of (1) the normal state and (2) the probability variation state or the short-time state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the probability variation state or the short time state. Further, in the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, any one of (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change and (2) a period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. The specific effect may be executable only in one case. For example, (1) The specific effect can be executed only in the period after the reach state is established in the reach change, and (2) In the case of the period outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change The production may not be performed.

  In the first effect form to the twelfth effect form, depending on whether the gaming state is (1) the normal state, or (2) the probability variation state or the short time state, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed. Although the type of the specific effect is different, when the big hit game state is controlled, whether or not the specific effect is executed and whether the specific effect to be executed is based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, or the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the common effect execution condition as in the probability variation state or the short-time state. . In addition, the gaming state classification is not limited to (1) normal state, (2) probability variation state or time-short state, for example, (1) high base state, (2) It may be a category of whether the state is a high base state, or may be a category of (1) a big hit gaming state or (2) a big hit gaming state.

  In the thirteenth effect form to the twenty-fourth effect form, the game period is (1) a period after the reach state is established in the reach change, or (2) outside the reach change period or before the reach state is established in the reach change. Depending on whether it is a period or not, the presence or absence of execution of a specific effect and the type of specific effect to be executed are determined, but not limited to such a game period classification, for example, (1) Number of reserved memories May be a period of 1 or less, or (2) the number of reserved memories is 2 or more, or (1) a period during which variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, (2) It may be a section indicating whether or not the decorative symbol variable display is not executed.

  Also, (1) it is a period in which variable display without reach effect (non-reach fluctuation) is being executed, or (2) it is a period in which variable display with reach effect (reach fluctuation) is being executed, It may be a category. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which variable display without pseudo-continuous effects is being executed or (2) a period during which variable display with pseudo-continuous effects is being executed. . Further, even if the classification is (1) before execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects, or (2) after execution of pseudo continuous effects in variable display with pseudo continuous effects. Good.

  In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect. May be executable. That is, when the winning condition is established, one of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect that matches a predetermined condition is executed (for example, the change result notice effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less). In the case where the number of stored memories is 2 or more, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed simultaneously. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that changes the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, the above-described change result notice effect (sound effect only, or sound effect and accessory effect) The pre-reading notice effect can be executed simultaneously, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the pre-reading notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, the change result notice effect is preferentially executed, and the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied If there is a reserved memory that is determined to be a big hit in the determination at the time of starting winning a prize, it is preferable to preferentially execute the prefetch notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to display the number of winnings with the operation button 9030 is set only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 90120 to be in the non-game state (only when the demonstration screen is displayed). Although the example which becomes possible was demonstrated, it is not restricted to such a form, it does not depend on a game state (for example, a normal state, a probability change state, a time-short state, a big hit game state), and the execution state (special symbol) of a special game Whether or not variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memories of special figure games), the execution status of ordinary figure games (whether or not variable display of normal symbols is being executed, and the number of reserved memories of ordinary figure games) ), Whether or not to display the number of winnings may be set by the operation button 9030. That is, whether or not the number of winnings is displayed by the operation button 9030 even during a period in which a game is being performed, for example, a period in which a decorative symbol variable display is being executed or a period in which the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state. It may be settable. In such a configuration, when it is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, regardless of the gaming state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot gaming state) The execution status of the game (whether or not the special symbol variable display is being executed, the number of reserved memory of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of reserved games stored in the usual game.

  In the above embodiment, there is no restriction on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the game hall side, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated. It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not only in such a form, you may make it restrict | limit the period in which setting operation in the game hall side is possible. For example, as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided, when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the game hall side, the setting screen shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to 50 (3) It is assumed that selection and determination are performed with the operation button 9030. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, short-time state, jackpot game state), or the execution status of a special figure game (whether or not a special symbol variable display is executed) 50 (1) to 50 (1) to FIG. 50 (b) depending on the number of special-purpose games held and the execution status of ordinary games (whether or not the variable display of ordinary symbols is being executed or the number of reserved memories of ordinary games). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period in which the big hit gaming state is controlled, the period in which the probability change state or the time-short state is controlled, the period in which the special figure game is being executed, the period in which the special figure game hold memory number is not 0, etc. The setting screen shown in 50 (1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the game hall side may be prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only when the game hall side displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening by setting the display changeover switch 9032 that cannot be operated by the player (the operation unit is set to the second position). A setting screen (FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)) for enabling the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Not only in the form, but as a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only on the game hall side is not provided, whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be set on both the player side and the game hall side Common setting screen (the same screen as in FIGS. 50 (1) to (3)) for selecting and deciding whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning a prize by operating the operation button 9030. Screen) may be displayed. In the configuration in which such a common setting screen is displayed, even if the game store clerk is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. In the case of the setting to be displayed, the number received in the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening (the operation unit is set to the second position), and the operation button 9030 is used for general operation. The information display unit 905 displays common information (for example, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings for each general winning opening stored in the display control table) when the number of winning winnings is set to be displayed. You may make it make it. In such a configuration, even when the setting is made so that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 9032, when the setting is made so that the common information is displayed by the operation of the operation button 9030 after that, Common information may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the settings received later.

  In the above-described embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings in the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, during the period when the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from when the reach state is established until the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. . Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall determines whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening in any period (game state). It may be settable, or may be settable by setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

  In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs the player ID (for example, the ID of the recording medium owned by the player or the personal identification ID registered on the website) by the operation button 9030. As a result, game data including the number of winnings in the general winning opening after the player ID is entered can be counted, and the operation button 9030 is operated when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is finished. Thus, the game data aggregated after the player ID is input may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures the two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and the game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information management server connected to the information terminal and the Internet And the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code. The game data managed in is updated. Since the player can access the information management server through the information terminal and check his / her stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), as a result, the player wins the general prize opening. The number can be grasped. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by a setting means on the game hall side (for example, a display changeover switch 9032), or setting means on the player side (For example, the operation button 9030) may be settable.

  In the case of such a form, a privilege may be given to the player according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings in the general winning award exceeds a predetermined number, a background image or application software that can be used on the information terminal is given as a privilege to the player with that player ID. Also good. In addition, points corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange part or all of the possession points for benefits.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening has been described, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. You may notify that it was done. For example, a winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when a game ball wins a general winning opening, and a winning notification sound effect or sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be. In the case of such a configuration, similarly to the above embodiment, whether or not to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or may be set by setting means (for example, operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning situation at the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 905 receives the number of winnings for each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening with respect to the number of balls fired to the game area, or the general winnings per time (The number of winning prizes to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winning prizes to the general winning mouth and the winning frequency. In addition, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the winning in the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening. Further, when a winning in the general winning opening occurs, the hitting operation handle, the operation button 9030, etc. may be vibrated. By using such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easy for a game or the like to grasp the winning frequency at the general winning opening.

  The number of winnings and the winning frequency at each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905 and also output to a management device such as a hall computer connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901 so as to be able to play games. It is possible to manage the number of prizes received at each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be used for maintenance of the gaming machine, for example.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball is won at a general winning opening, and a different sound effect from when winning at another winning opening such as a start winning opening. Should be output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be made different for each general winning opening. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a specific general winning opening is won.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the notice effect may be changed. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display that is executed after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, the execution ratio and the effect mode of the notice effect change, and a predetermined variable, for example, a predetermined variable Until the number of times of display is executed, it is preferable that the changed execution ratio and effect mode are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball has won the general winning opening, and a predetermined variable display number, for example, is executed for a predetermined period. Until then, the music after the change should be continued. Further, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific music piece (for example, a big hit music piece) may be output. Also, based on the fact that a game ball has won the general prize opening or that the number of winning game balls to the general prize opening has reached a predetermined number, the player reproduces from a plurality of songs (BGM). The music (BGM) may be selectable.

  Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music being played may be continuously output. For example, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, the music in the big hit game may be continuously output even after the big hit game state is finished. Further, a stage change for changing the background image of the decorative design and the music (BGM) may be executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening. Note that the stage (background image and music) of the transfer destination may be made different depending on which of the plurality of general winning awards is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, the specific effect executed based on the winning to the general winning opening is described as an example of the change result notice effect and the prefetch notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, an effect may be provided in which a general winning opening in which a game ball is not winning among a plurality of general winning openings is displayed, and a character appears when a gaming ball wins the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even if a game ball is launched into the game area, the game ball does not win the general prize opening for a predetermined period, or the winning frequency at the general prize opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, a specific notification such as displaying on the image display device 905 that a winning in a general winning opening has not occurred may be executed. In addition, when a game ball is not fired only in a specific general winning slot among a plurality of general winning slots for a predetermined period, even though the game ball has been fired in the gaming area, or in a specific general winning slot When the frequency is less than the threshold value, a specific notification such as displaying that the winning for the specific general winning award has not occurred on the image display device 905 may be executed.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a simultaneous performance is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), depending on the number of winnings in the general winning opening until the simultaneous performance is performed, or simultaneously You may make it perform a specific production | presentation according to the prize-winning to a general winning opening during a production period. In addition, the decorative design may be changed according to the winning at the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative design, the stop design may be changed, or a sliding effect may be executed.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, each time a game ball wins a general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 905 is incremented by one to recognize the winning and the number of winnings in the general winning opening. It may be easy. Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening. When the number reaches the predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying “100 breakthrough!” On the image display device 905 may be executed. In addition, when the timing when the number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is a period in which a gaming machine error is reported based on fraud detection or failure detection, It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is given priority over the specific effect, and the specific effect that has been put on hold after the notification of the gaming machine error is ended.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, every time a game ball wins a general winning opening, a winning sound is output, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is given rather than the winning sound. You may make it output preferentially. In addition, every time a game ball wins in the general winning opening, a winning display is performed on the image display device 905, and during the notification of the gaming machine error, the display of the gaming machine error is given priority over the winning display. You may make it make it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening May be added to the number of award balls paid out based on the above, and displayed on the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. In the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit gaming state]. At the same time, it is preferable that the number of prize balls to be paid out is added based on the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of winning balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball at the winning jackpot, and [in the jackpot gaming state according to the winning timing of the game ball at the general winning mouth] The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of winning balls may be varied according to the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball is won in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B in the left gaming area 9010A, ten winning balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening in the right gaming area 9010B. When a game ball is won in 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, five prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect may be executed in which a game ball is awarded to a general winning opening. For example, in a form in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings as in the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, A general winning opening in which a game ball is not winning among the general winning holes is notified by the image display device 905, and an effect that suggests to the player to aim at the general winning opening in which the gaming ball has not been won is executed. It is good to. Moreover, in the form in which the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game balls have won in a specific order in the plurality of winning holes as in the eighth effect form and the sixteenth effect form, The order of winning should be notified by the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, “Aim at the first general prize opening!” Is displayed, and after the winning to the first general prize opening 9050A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the first start prize opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the first start prize opening is confirmed, finally "Aim for the second general prize opening!" After winning the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) In the case where the game area 9010 is provided with a guide path for a game ball toward the general winning opening, and the entrance sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the entry sensor, it is possible to execute an effect of informing in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening. Thereby, the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening can be reduced. In addition, a certain period is secured from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening until the payout of the winning ball is executed, and the production based on the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do it.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 905, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guide route connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. As a configuration, the player may be interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guide route.

(15) You may make it perform the production | presentation in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display apparatus 905 is updated for every prize-winning to a general winning opening. For example, when the character grows up for each prize winning in the general winning opening and reaches a predetermined number of winnings (when the character grows up to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege etc.) is executed. You may do it. In addition, an effect that increases the gauge is executed every time a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, and when a predetermined number of winnings is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) Etc.) may be executed. In this form of presentation, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. You may be made to do.

(16) In the above embodiment, the type of specific effect (variation result notice effect, prefetch notice effect) to be executed differs depending on the gaming state when the winning conditions are established, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although the example in which the sound is different has been described, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be varied depending on the game state without being limited to such a form. In the probabilistic state and the short time state, there are many cases where the effect by the game effect lamp 909 and the music to be played are flashy to improve the interest compared to the normal state, so the aspect of the specific effect is also more You may make it a flashy aspect which is easy to understand for a player.

(17) When a certain number of game balls have been fired in the game area 9010, but the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency are less than the reference value, the player is usually informed Information on gaming machines that are difficult to perform, for example, a latent probability change state and a limiter may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described. However, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory) If the winning condition is satisfied when the total number of the number and the number of the second reserved storage) is 0, neither the fluctuation result notice effect nor the prefetch notice effect can be executed. In this case, an effect that is not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, the appearance of a specific character or the reproduction of a specific music) may be executed as the specific effect.

(19) In addition, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved memories (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) is also 0 Alternatively, the execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and thereafter, the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed, or at the timing when the number of stored memories becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect is not immediately executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions, and the specific effect that has been suspended based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied or the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied. You may make it perform.

(20) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the game ball is not won in the general winning opening (for example, “the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small. May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, only for the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is in the maintenance mode in which the image display device 905 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. Regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, when the number of winnings in the general winning award for a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 905 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning award. It may be. Similarly to the display control of the number of winnings to the general winning a prize, based on the setting by the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, when the number of winnings to the general winning award in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, You may make it display on the image display apparatus 905 that a game ball does not win a winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings in the general winning award in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, the game ball is excessively won in the general winning opening (for example, “ The message “There are too many winnings” may be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, only for the period when the information for the store clerk (winning number information stored in the winning number management table) is in the maintenance mode in which the image display device 905 is displayed. It may be displayed on the image display device 905 that the game ball is excessively won at the winning opening. A game shop clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the gaming information management device that manages the gaming information, and the gaming information The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. The game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when the gaming control microcomputer 90100 detects a winning of a game ball to the general winning opening (for example, outputs one pulse signal for each winning). By doing so, the gaming information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device, as game information, the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) or the number of winnings in a general winning opening per predetermined number of balls (for example, 6000 shots). Alternatively, the winning rate for the general winning opening (the number of winnings for the general winning opening ÷ the number of shots) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the production control CPU 90120 has been described with respect to an example in which the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 is increased every time a general winning opening is won. You may make it the aspect of the object currently displayed on the image display apparatus 905 change for every prize-winning to a winning opening. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is notified by voice notification using the speakers 908L and 908R, or by turning on / off the game effect lamp 909, decoration LED, and 7 segments. May be. Further, the present invention is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information on winning mouths in which the number of payouts, winning ratios, etc. are not in a predetermined reference range (or within the reference range) is notified. You may do it.

(25) In the above embodiment, when in the maintenance mode, the information in the winning number management table is displayed as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth) as shown in FIG. Although an example of notification (display) in a manner unrelated to the performance performed in the game has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be performed in a form according to the aspect of the performance performed in the game. Good. By notifying in the form according to the aspect of the production, as compared with the case of notifying only by the table data as shown in FIG. Can be easily grasped. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demonstration screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, or a big hit effect, and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905, and may be a sound. Or an effect by a lamp. In addition, informing in a manner according to the production mode, for example, a character appearing during a notice production or reach production reads out information in the winning number management table, outputs a sound, Regardless, the resident character that is displayed on the image display device 905 and provides a notice or explanation of the game may read out the information in the winning number management table or output the sound. The information in the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game without being limited to the character image.

(26) In the above embodiment, the operation means such as the mode changeover switch 9031 operated to display the information in the winning number management table as information for the store clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning mouth). However, although an example in which the player is inoperable and is provided at a position where only the game shop clerk can operate, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the player and the game shop clerk are inoperable. Thus, the game machine may be provided at a position that can be operated only by persons concerned such as an inspector, an inspector, and a manufacturer of the gaming machine. Moreover, you may make it provide in the position which can be operated if it is persons other than said player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to game winning. However, a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes or a counter of 4 bytes at maximum Can also be provided. At this time, calculation for displaying on the display monitor 9029 the two types of the above-mentioned ratio (%) and combination (%) based on the total number of acquired balls of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 104, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the upper 16 bits are used for calculation. You may go. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquired balls is 30000 per day by a 4-byte counter, 429483225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 1431611.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96A, an example in which the display monitor 9029 is provided in the central portion on the main substrate 9011 accommodated in the substrate case 90201 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 105A, a main board 9011C without a display monitor and a display board 11D are provided separately from the main board 9011C, and the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. A display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display substrate 9011D. In this case, the main board 9011 </ b> C receives the associations and ratios displayed on the display monitor 9029 and receives data used for these calculations. The main board 9011C transmits information relating to the calculated combination, the ratio, and the control for displaying them to the display board 9011D via the harness 9011E. In the display substrate 9011D, the role and ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 9011C.

  The main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are housed in a substrate case 90201A which is a caulking substrate case. Caulking pins 9011B are attached to the substrate case 90201A in the same manner as the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. Since the caulking pins 9011B are provided, the main substrate 9011C and the display substrate 9011D are completely enclosed in the substrate case 90201A, and an illegal act on the main substrate 9011C is prevented. Similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 96A, the substrate case 90201A is provided with holes and heat dissipation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct display on the display monitor 9029.

  As shown in FIG. 105B, the display substrate 9011D may be provided outside the substrate case 90201B which is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105C, the display substrate 9011D may be sealed in the substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be sealed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display substrate 9011D is connected to the main substrate 9011C by a harness 9011E. Similarly to the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 96A, the substrate case 90201C is provided with holes and heat dissipation holes, and is provided with a predetermined seal. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct display on the display monitor 9029. Note that the substrate case 90201C enclosing the display substrate 9011D may not be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 95 (A), and a caulking use record is written on the label 9011R. Also good. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. As described above, since part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden by the label 9011R, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the role and the role ratio. Even when the label 9011R is pasted, it may be pasted at a position where the display monitor 9029 is not hidden.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electrical accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) that is opened and closed by a solenoid or a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Instead, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by its own weight may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 9029, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment. Moreover, it is good also as a liquid crystal display device, organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, etc. instead of LED.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a may be opened to deal with an error cancellation regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the role combination and the role ratio. For example, a supply mechanism for supplying game balls (supply balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 903 to pay out game balls. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball is clogged, the error may be canceled by opening the glass door frame 903a to eliminate the clogging. Regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 9029, when the error is canceled by opening the glass door frame 903a, the display of the role and ratio on the display monitor 9029 is not performed. Good.

  Further, at this time, in order not to display the association, the ratio, or the like on the display monitor 9029, it is also possible to make it a condition that no error occurs in the display of the association, the ratio, etc. Here, the error with respect to the display of the association, the ratio, etc. is, for example, detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 102, acquisition of winning information within business hours determined in step 104, step S90106 It is good also as detection of the predetermined number or more prize-winning with respect to the attacker per unit time judged by (1). By making the condition that such an error with respect to the display of the association, the ratio, etc. has not occurred, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player sees information about the association, the ratio, etc.

  In addition, the glass door frame 903a is opened regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029 to cancel the error. After the error cancellation is completed, a predetermined period until the role of the display monitor 9029, the role ratio, etc. are displayed. For example, it may wait for 1 minute and display after a predetermined time has elapsed. After canceling the occurrence of an error, the cause of the error cannot be completely removed, and the same error often occurs. By displaying the role association, role ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player sees information such as role association, role ratio, etc. even when such an error occurs. . The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a ball jam in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of a failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the ball jam in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  The main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be disposed at a position on the right side 1/3 of the main board 9011, and the error indicator may be disposed at a position on the left side 1/3 of the main board 9011. Further, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easier to understand, the position of the display monitor 9029 on the main substrate 9011 may be printed on the substrate case 90201 by characters, or a sticker may be attached to the substrate case 90201. You may keep it.

(29) In the above embodiment,
We explained how to calculate the ratio (%) and combination (%) of pachinko gaming machines and display them on the display monitor, but in the slot machine, the ratio (%) and combination (%) of pachinko gaming machines A value corresponding to may be calculated and displayed.

  In the following, a method for calculating the combination (%) in the slot machine will be described. The slot machine can start changing the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a winning occurs according to the result of the changing symbol. For winnings in slot machines, shift to a special game state that increases the probability of occurrence of a prize-winning with the addition of gaming value, a re-game winning that allows the change of symbols to be started without setting the number of bets, and a prize-winning There is a bonus prize. Here, the combination (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of the game value obtained as a result of the winning of the symbol as a result of the symbol variation during the predetermined number of symbol variations (the aforementioned pachinko game) The total number of gaming values obtained by awarding winnings as a result of symbol changes during the period of transition to the special gaming state (equivalent to the total number of balls acquired in the machine) (in the aforementioned pachinko gaming machine) (Corresponds to the number of consecutive winning characters). For example, in a period in which 6000 symbols are changed, if the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, the prize is awarded in the period when the game state is shifted to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the consecutive (%).

  In addition, although the example which displays the calculated duty ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the center of the main board was shown, it is not restricted to this, a payout control board, etc. Display monitors may be provided on other boards, gaming board surfaces, gaming machine frames (base frames), and the like. Further, the display is not limited to a dedicated display monitor for displaying the ratio (%) and the combination (%), but an existing display device (for example, the image display device 905, 7-segment display for displaying an error). A combination ratio (%) or combination (%) may be displayed by using a display device such as a credit display device or a payout number display device in a slot machine.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached (reach is not reached), such as presence / absence of pseudo-continuity, presence / absence of sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted, and in the second command, the type of reach, the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designating command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop if not reach) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. Note that the main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. By notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the above-described gaming machine is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and encloses gaming media and scores based on the occurrence of winnings. The invention can also be applied to the enclosed game machine to be given.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed in advance by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 9c, 9d 4th symbol display area 13 1st start winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 18c Total reserved memory display part 20 Special Variable winning ball equipment 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 Main effect lamp 9011 Board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A, 9022B Start-up switch 9023 Count switch 9029 Display monitor 9030 Operation button 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 901000 Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A main board that controls the game;
A predetermined area where prize balls are paid out by passing game media;
Information display means capable of displaying predetermined prize ball information relating to a prize ball paid out by passage of the game medium to the predetermined area;
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A promotion notification means capable of executing a promotion notification for encouraging the player's action;
An effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection of the player's movement by the detecting means;
The promotion notification means includes a first pattern that displays at least a first promotion image, and a second promotion image that is different from the first promotion image in addition to the first promotion image. And can be executed by the second pattern displaying
The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the promotion notification is executed by either the first pattern or the second pattern,
The information display means is provided on the main board so as not to obstruct visibility to the predetermined prize ball information.